Home

QX Hawk Industrial Imager User`s Manual

1. Controller MscanLogix5561 Sed lia Handler Name Value Style Data Type Description Tasks E QxHawk_10_big_pt IN 5 QXHawk_IN_big_udt choose one CPS for IN and OUT _sm 5 fa MainTask ek ca e QXHawk_OUT_udt echo of OUT assembly back to PLC amp MainProgram QXHawk_IO_big_ptIN GUT_echo usertag Decimal DINT helpful for identification and comm veri m neg T E Ohak 10 bia ptIN GUT_echo command lt 7 of OUT assembly back to PLC Unscheduled Programs Scien cr QXHawk_external_outputs discrete output control reserved E Motion Groups ME e E a T E E status of discrete inputs La Ungrouped Axes x QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN ext_out eo OXHawk_extemaloutputs status of discrete outputs e Add On Instructions QXHawk_IO_big_ptiN device_status Coal OxHawk_device_status c ne CPS for IN and OUT _sm g a Data Types BS QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN sequence 3 Decimal DINT When this changes trigger decode per _ GGXHewk_ 0_big_ptINtigger_ent 3 Decimal DINT Tanger comer tho QXHawk_command A OXHawk_device_status A QxHawk_I0_big_pt IN decode_match_cnt 3 Decimal DINT Good read match counter lt V o QXHawk_external_inputs A QxHawk_I0_big_pt IN mismatch_ent 0 Decimal DINT Misr counter 0 QXHawk_external_outputs B
2. Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge 0 0033 0 08 0 005 0 13 1 to 6 25 to 152 0 53 13 1 8 46 0 2 5 0 8 20 ee 0 0075 0 19 0 010 0 25 1 to 14 25 to 356 0 53 13 3 5 89 0 8 20 2 5 64 0 015 0 38 0 020 0 51 2 to 29 51 to 737 0 53 13 7 5 191 1 5 38 9 229 0 035 0 89 0 050 1 27 3 to 60 76 to 1 524 1 03 26 15 5 394 7 178 50 1 270 0 066 1 68 0 100 2 54 6 to 96 152 to 2 438 1 08 27 25 635 9 229 65 1 651 Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge 0 0033 0 08 0 005 0 13 1 to 3 25 to 76 0 83 21 1 8 46 0 4 10 0 8 20 30 0 0075 0 19 0 010 0 25 1 to 6 5 25 to 165 0 83 21 3 5 89 0 8 20 1 8 46 0 015 0 38 0 020 0 51 1 to 16 25 to 406 0 83 21 8 3 211 2 51 8 5 216 0 035 0 89 0 050 1 27 2 to 32 51 to 813 1 3 33 16 4 417 3 76 21 5 546 Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge jii 0 0075 0 19 0 010 0 25 1 to 5 25 to 127 1 3 33 4 1 104 1 5 38 2 51 0 015 0 38 0 020 0 51 1 to 9 5 25 to 241 1 3 33 7 5 191 2 51 6 152 0 035 0 89
3. Description 0 Hawk 1 Show this dialog at startup E Skip EZ Mode 1 Click the button showing the QX Hawk 2 Click OK Note You can also simply double click the button showing your imager to make your selection 3 Click Yes when the following dialog appears ESP Note If you need to select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model gt New Model in the menu toolbar 1 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start QX Hawk C Mount When you start ESP the model menu will appear Select a Model Current Legacy Curent Legacy eee ee EZ Match engau 0x 830 0 870 MS 890 MS ae MS Connect Quadrus MINI Tone ee MINI Hawk QXHawk GXHawk rere HS 2D MS 0 Mobile Hawk Quadrus Verifier HE 4xT Description 0X Hawk C Mount 1 J Show this dialog at startup Skip EZ Mode 1 Click the button showing the QX Hawk C Mount 2 Click OK Note You can also simply double click the button showing your imager to make your selection 3 Click Yes when the following dialog appears Would you like to connect to the OX Hawk C Mount ves J m Note If you need to select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model gt New Model in the menu toolbar QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 9 Connect Ste
4. COMM O L A BOER TRIGGER QX 1 Wiring Diagram Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2 is a 12 pin socket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed The simple diagram above also shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device Power can be bussed between imagers and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 13 Electrical Specifications Optoisolated Outputs The reader has optoisolated outputs that can transfer signals from the reader to peripherals Outputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed ina system because the output common is shared by all outputs NPN Output for Host Input Host Camera Input Output 2 0 Input I W Output 3 3 T Input 4 Output Common NPN Output for External Load Output 1 Ou ut 2 z Camera re A 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices PNP Output for Ho
5. To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Communication settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 5 Camera Setup CMOS WVGA Camera Settings B C Camera Settings ain 20 Shutter Speed 2500 Gain Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through autocalibration and is the recommended method for configuring this settings A higher value will increase the brightness of the image but the noise performance of the system is reduced Prior to configuring the gain the required shutter speed should be set and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting Lamera Settings 0 39 Shutter Speed 2500 Shutter Speed This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical If an object is moving fast and a slow shutter speed is selected blurring or smearing of the object will occur As shutter speed is increased the amount of light required or gain needed has to be increased since the pixels exposure time has decreased Camera Settings sain eal Shutter Speed 2500 60 40000 r 4 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup CCD SXGA Camera Settings B C amera Settings ain 20
6. Controller Properties Unscheduiec Progra J Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions 5 8 Data Types j a User Defined Eil QxHawk_command Eil QXHawk_device_status Synchronous Copy File Source QXHawek Dest XHavk_lO_big_pt IN E QxXHawk_external_inputs Synchronous Copy File K QXHawk_external_outputs Source XHawk_lO_big_pt OUT KA OXHawk_IN_big_udt Dest aXHawk O A QxHawk_IN_small_udt Length 1 0 QXHawk_IO_big_udt 0 QXHawk_IO_small_udt o QXHawk_OUT_udt 5 A Strings E strize KA sted i STRING oa ae Ee ESE MainRoutine gt MainPrograr 4 gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags eert HTT Change controller mode to Remote Run Rung 1 of 2 hpp per fe A 110 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices 19 To open the Program Tags right click on Program Tags and select Monitor Tags f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit view Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help Bisul S 5 ol Sldel HI Me KI Ala Rem Run a IB Run Mode al 5 Tp R Path ETHIP 1 10 10 5 233 Backplane 0 zdl No Forces b Controller OK No Edits ce Ok 1 0 0K Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler ke mrez avorites Jap dE Tasks i Data Type Description a MainTask AB ETHERNET_MODULE C 0 2 MainProgram i AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_176Bytes I 0
7. Window of Interest Margin 20 1280 pixels il QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 125 I O Parameters Database Identifier Output Useful in tracking which database entries read which symbols Database Identifier Output Status Database Identifier Oukput Disabled Separator Character SP Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled the imager will append a two digit number and the characters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture DBO2 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Character The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Database Identifier Qukput Disabled Separator Character oF NUL SOH STx ET EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF VT aa LA St SI DLE DCI Click Delete to remove characters 5 126 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Input 1 Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Input Mode Determines the function of the Input pin Cisse Active State Weier Reset Counts Unlatch Out
8. Request all fields are in hex Host 10 10 4 130 Predefined None QX HAWK Connection Instance 1 RPIs 20 20 Cyclic Service hex le Class hex 4 STI ATA IA TIATED Slolelolololololololololololoto Instance hex 301 Attribute hex 13 10 10 5 234 Member hex Symbol Tag Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Oa 26 f9 ay Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 PD ucmn ka 2i Timestamp messag 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 12 16 15 33 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 7 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 30 msec Sent API 20 00 msec Revd pkts 278 Sent pkts 352 12 13 31 755 Error Request Failed Target is not responding 1P1BWaAL 7EN Freee Damiact Failad Taranath ie nak recnandina 1 Classi connections active Max Recy Delay 7 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Max Recy API 25 30 Max Send API 20 00 The order of data displayed in each assembly block corresponds to the object model documentation For a quick test we can simulate the PLC setting the User Tag and QX Hawk echoing it back 11 Click on the first byte User Tag in the green a
9. Company Name RYZ Corp Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page Saved Options POF Files pdf sd i Show Report Options dialog during Save Report Default Report Type POF Files pdt amp HTML Files htm CSW Files csv pel Autofit Content Low Graphic HTML Append to file Rich Text Edit Files rtf iM Store Report without file path prompt a Typically you will be asked Use symbol data for file name hee vee wish to store your report CAD ocuments and Settings symbol grades Default Path If you do not want to be prompted to choose a file Automatically open generated report Print after saving er bag E eb W Includelmage C Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality 100 1 100 Click the Include Image check box to output the captured symbol image with your saved report as a Overall Grade Based On Bitmap or JPEG image file i Symbol Contrast i Print Growth Axial Nonuniformity Enables ESP to parse UII symbol data into the correct M Unused ECC fields and output order defined by the U S Department of Defense IUID initiative if Enable UII Parsing lt a Detault Settings Revert Settings Returns all settings to Returns all settings to default
10. IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE real MOUNTING BRACKET Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the imager e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 21 Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Microscan offers two flying leads cordsets 61 000166 01 and 61 000167 01 for use in QX hardware configurations The diagrams below show the correspondence of wire colors to pins 61 000166 01 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug Flying Leads The 61 000166 01 cordset connects to QX Hawk Connector B serial and QX 1 Connector 2 BROWN 3000 50 GREEN 100 20 270 C ZA an mR e GREY PINK RED BLUE oo 61 000167 01 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Socket Flying Leads The 61 000167 01 cordset connects to QX Hawk Connectors A and P M and QX 1 Connectors 1 and 3 WHITE BROWN 3000 50 ah 100 20 YELLOW GREY PINK RED BLUE 2 3 4 5 7 8 ri 0 l 2 A 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager Use
11. Postal Symbologies Important Postal Symbologies must have a pixels per element value of no more than 7 to be decoded reliably by the QX Hawk The imager must be configured to specific read range field of view and camera parameters before decoding Postal Symbologies E ESP Untitled Seles File Model Options Connect Help E Q 4pp Mode Autoconnect Switch Model TEE Welcome to Easy Setup Program 1 First position the imager at the desired Focal Distance Position the postal symbol in the center of the imager s field of view Note To avoid glare set the angie of the reader about 75 degrees relative to the symbol 4 Click Locate to begin FRMMAIRmAn mnim Test Stop Decodes per Second AEC Bo 4 For Help press F1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 85 Symbologies Postal Symbology Type 1D Postal Symbologies are used in mail sortation auditing certified mail registered mail metered mail and point of sale POS applications This commend determines the postal symbology that will be decoded by the imager E Postal Symbologies Disabled w POSTMET Status Disabled PLANET Status US Postal LISPS4CB Status Australa Post POSTMET Allow B and B Fields Australia Post Allow 0 FOC U S Postal POSTNET PLANET USPS4CB When U S Postal is enabled the imager will only decode POSTNET PLANET and USPS4CB symbols Important POSTNET Status PLANET Status
12. initiate 2 Click Locate to begin Click Test button to a sliding start the Read Rate focus Click the App Mode button test and click Stop control to access configuration trees to end the test and other setup features ta so C Decodes per Second E Contrast lt lt ag mm Attribute When Decodes per Second is checked the read rate test displays how many decodes the imager achieves each second instead of displaying a percentage Symbol data is Contrast brightens displayed here the image QX Hawk 1 QX Hawk BEMAD Point to Point COM1 For Help press F1 2 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual App Mode From EZ Mode click on the App Mode button to access the tabbed tree controls in Parameters the intuitive user interfaces in Setup the Terminal interface and the Utilities interface bf App Mode Using ESP Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Click this icon to Menu toolbar Click here to open return to EZ Mode a ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help 3 EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Communic
13. lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 Diagnostics Output 1 lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt lt K790 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 unused service unit gt Symbol Quality Output 1 lt K800 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt Symbol Quality Output 3 Output 1 Parameters lt K802 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on output state pulse width outout mode gt Output 3 Parameters lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type s
14. Calibrate Imager settings can be adjusted automatically for optimum performance by either the EZ Button or by ESP During the calibration routine the imager will flash its amber Read Rate percent LEDs and illumination LEDs while searching camera settings and determining the best configuration for decoding symbol data Upon successful completion of this routine a green LED pattern will flash brightly and illuminate the symbol If unsuccessful the imager will emit 5 short beeps and stop searching Calibrate by ESP 1 Click the Calibrate button Calibrate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data A successful calibration will display a green frame around the symbol and the following message will appear Uploading all reader parameters After a moment the symbol data will be presented in the field below the image display window Calibrate by EZ Button 1 Hold down the EZ Button for about two seconds and release when you hear two short beeps The 20 and 40 LEDs will illuminate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release Calibrate by Serial Command Send lt CAL gt from a terminal program to begin auto calibration 1 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 9 Test Read
15. Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Master Symbol Index Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options 1 to 32768 Master Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options Any valid ASCII string Match Replace Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 68 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default MATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Mismatch Replace Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default MISMATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 69 Serial Commands Diagnostics Hours Since Reset Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt Hours Since Reset Read only Hours Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Mes
16. Options Any 7 bit ASCII character A 42 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices External Trigger State Serial Cmd lt K202 active state gt Default 1 Positive Options 0 Negative 1 Positive End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 0 Timeout Options 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or New Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Read Cycle Timeout Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 100 x10 ms 1 second Options 1 to 65535 Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 1 Options 1 to 255 Mode Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 0 Non Consecutive Options 0 Non Consecutive 1 Consecutive Multisymbol Number of Symbols Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default 1 Options 1 to 100 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 43 Serial Commands Multisymbol Separator Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Start Trigger Start Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K229 start character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Stop Trigger Stop Character Non Delimited
17. RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX Protocol Commands 0x21 T 0x3D 0x28 0x29 0x06 0x15 enabled lt K141 0 gt H ACK lt K100 gt n ACK T lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X ACK T Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX lt K141 0 gt H ACK lt K100 gt n ACK T lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X timeout reached imager_TX tJ timeout reached imager_TX tJ timeout reached imager_TX tJ timeout reached imager_TX A 82 P QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select Ox1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX ACK imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transa
18. Select Unit 1 to receive data imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX LRC imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC imager_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 85 Protocol Commands Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST _TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Eve
19. Serial Cmd lt K230 stop character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Processing Timeout Serial Cmd lt K245 processing timeout gt Default 200 0 2 seconds Options 1 to 65535 A 44 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes sort database gt lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance sub sampling row pointer column Se ee Henk Se pointer row depth column width symbol type morphology operation morphology size gt Configuration Database QX lt K255 index shutter speed gain unused sub sampling row pointer column Hawk C Mount pointer unused column width unused unused unused gt Load Current Setting from Configuration Database lt K255 index gt Request Database Index lt K255 index gt Setting Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Number of Active Indexes Number of Active Indexes Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Default 0 Disabled Options O to 10 Number of Database Cycles Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 to 255 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 45 Ser
20. Symbol Quality Separator This field specifies the separator used to separate the quality output data Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator Output Mode NUL SH ST ETX EQT ENG ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF c so _s DLe Der De2 Dca Dca NAK SYN ETB can Em sue ESC FS GS AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Output Mode Determines how symbol quality evaluations will be output Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Gade o 5 160 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Data Matrix Data Matrix B ISO TEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Print Growth Axial Mon uniForrnity Unused ECC Grading Percent Cell Damage Capture Time Locate Time Decode Time Pixels Per Element ECC Level Matrix Size Quiet one Symbol Angle Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ISO IEC 16022 Parameters ISO TEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Disabled Print Growth Disabled Axial Mon uniForrnity Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Outputs the candidate symbol s Symbol Contrast value Print Growth Outputs the candidate symbol s Print Growth value Axial Non Uniformity Outputs the candidate symbol s Axial Non Uniformity value Unused ECC Outputs the candidate symbol
21. enabled Sig Match Replace Disabled Replacement String cence Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled Se Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String Disabled Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MI SMATCH 5 174 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics tree control i5 Parameters r Parameters ESP Walues E Diagnostics Hours Since Reset Read only Hours 0 Minutes T N Service Message o oe seeks Disabled is the eee Service Message Threshold Enabled Resolution Seconds User Defined Name gs HAWE To open nested options To change a setting double click single click the the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the option
22. 0 020 0 51 0 030 0 76 1 to 23 5 25 to 597 1 3 33 18 3 465 3 8 97 19 483 A 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Read Ranges cont lt _ Read Range gt Read Area th of Fiela insid De Outside Edge QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 7 General Specifications FIS Options FIS 6800 0110G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 15 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1110G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 15 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0210G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 30 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1210G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 30 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0310G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 45 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1310G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 45 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0010G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS C Mount Optic Serial FIS 6800 1010G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS C Mount Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0100G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD 15 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1100G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD 15 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0200G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD 30 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1200G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD 30 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0300G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD 45 Degree Optic Seri
23. 14 Delete any empty rungs f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsa S e o gt HS G Te Offline J E RUN e n 7 Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 23a Backplane O SE No Forces gt _ F Ok pat ihe MEAR No Edits eae 4 llel ar a lt gt gt Redundancy 19 m 4 gt h Favorites Bit Timer Counter _ _ lt lt lt gt H Controller MscanLogix5S61 Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller a Controller Tags a Controller Fault Handler tae i Power Up Handler B MainProgram MainRoutine Sj Tasks a rs a MainTask i i saja El 2 MainProgram __ Program Tags i MainRoutine z PS eerie catia co Ba Copy Run Ctrl C choose one CPS for choose one CPS for Ungrouped Axes Sopy 9 IN and OUT IN and OUT Add On Instructions f Paste tri _small_pt or _big_pt _small_pt or _big_pt Data Types E al User Defined Delete Rung Del Synchronous Copy File Synchronous Copy File 1 y y wo QXHawk_command Source QXHawk l Source QXHawk l i j Ada Rung ae Dest QXHavwk_lO_small_pt IN Dest QXHawk_lO_big_pt IN 0 QXHawk_device_status Ed Run aie eae i 3 QXHawk_external_inputs ESD engt S QxHawk_external_outputs Edit Rung Comment Ctrl D R QxHawk_IN_big_udt Import Rung 1 i A Export Rung Synchronous Copy File Synchronous Copy File a Q
24. 2 Half Duplex 3 Full Duplex 4 Customized QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 39 Serial Commands Destination Port Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A Options 0 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX Hawk Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 6 EtherNet IP Ambles to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Echo to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at ETX Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default CR 0x0D Options Any 7 bit ASCII character A 40 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Output at Timeout Serial Cmd lt
25. All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled To turn the targeting pattern off quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 116 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Three Beeps Hold down button until three beeps are heard Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Default Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected
26. Daisy Chain ID will automatically disable Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information and Diagnostics Output for the Source Port Symbol Data Output will be automatically enabled Extra Symbol Information will be automatically enabled and Diagnostics Output will be automatically disabled for the Destination Port Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrce Ro2s2 B Daisy Chain ID Skatus Disabled Daisy Chain ID nesbled Enabled 5 36 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Daisy Chain ID The Daisy Chain ID is a two character identifier Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrCE RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 37 Communication Daisy Chain Autoconfigure For quick setup of a daisy chain configuration The command to Autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the primary imager and the software responds in the following ways e Counts the number of secondary imagers in the daisy chain e Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary imager where the first secondary imager is number 1 the primary imager s ID being a 0 e Propagates the communication settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary imager to the ports of each secondary imager e Resets each secondary imager e Confirms that each secondary imager has acquired the new settings When setting
27. Ifa timeout occurs initiate error handling QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual NET and MOD LED Indicators Appendices MOD Module Indicator State Summary Requirement EOR an Implementation If no power is supplied to the device the Steady OFF No power module status indicator will be steady Per requirement OFF Device lf the device is operating correctly the Steady GREEN l module status indicator will be steady Per requirement operational GREEN If the device has detected a non recoverable Safe Mode Basic Steady RED Major fault minor fault the module status indicator comm only Scanning will be steady RED system non functional While the device is performing its power up RER GREEN Self test testing the module status indicator will Per requirement be flashing GREEN RED NET Network Indicator State Summary Requirement nueTosean Implementation Steady OFF Flashing GREEN No power no IP address No connections If the device does not have an IP address or is powered off the network status indicator will be steady OFF If the device has no established connections but has obtained an IP address the network status indicator will be flashing GREEN Per requirement Before device has acquired an IP address via DHCP Per requirement After device has acquired an IP address static or DHCP If the device has at least one established connection even t
28. Max Send Delay 1 msec Max Recv API 25 32 Max Send API 19 98 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Predefined None v QX HAWK Connection Instance 1 RPIs 20 20 Cyclic z Service hex Class hex 4 15 1413 12 11109 8 7 6 6 43 210 5 ceccecececccececcecgcEeg Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 OO 01 00 OO OO OO OO OO 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O00 00 OO 00 OO OO OO OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 32 msec Sent API 19 98 msec Reyd pkts 356 Sent pkts 451 A 117 Allen Bradley PLC Setup ElPScan begins polling the unit and displays the content of the IN blue and OUT green assemblies Bg ElPScan ElPscan qxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request IJO Stack Device 1O Module Help D H Target ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 B Adapter 10 10 4 130
29. Output 3 Parameters Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Note If you are using a QX Hawk C Mount and External Illumination Mode is enabled the parameters for Output On Pulse Width and Output Mode are ignored Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory B Output 3 Parameters Our puUer On Mismatch or No Read w Output State Mismatch or No Aead Pulse Width Match or Good Read Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis No Read Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Trend Analysis Symbol Huality H Diagnostics Diagnostic Warming In Read Cycle Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch
30. QXHawk_IO_big_ptIN noread_ent 0 Decimal DINT Noread counter lt N _ eB a 4 QXHawk_IO_big_ptiN symb_str 123456789012vFO00v 0118 str128 barcode data string E inca ann GxHawk_10_big_ ptOUT freee QHawk_OUT_udt oe ee a i OxHawk_IO_small_udt E QXHawk_10_big_pt OUT usertag Aoo E Decima DINT helpful for identification and comm veri f OxHawk_OUT udt XHawk_I0_big_pt OUT command me QXHawk_command m El A Strings E Q gt Hawk_ O_big_pt OUT command trigger O Decimal BOOL Rising edge starts reading a str128 o XHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command new_master O Decimal BOOL Rising edge requests next decode to E A e QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res2 0 Decimal BOOL reserved QXHawk_10_big_pt OUT command res3 Ol Decimal BOOL reserved m XHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res4 O Decimal BOOL reserved QHawk_10_big_pt OUT command res5 O Decimal BOOL reserved a OKHawk_I0_big pt OUT command res6 O Decimal BOOL reserved QHawk_10_big_pt OUT command res O Decimal BOOL reserved m Q Hawk_IO_big_pt OUT command disable_scan 0 Decimal BOOL Rising edge disables reading 4 gt Monitor Tags A Edit Tags 4 gt Ready a A 112 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices The IN usertag_echo will change to match the same value as the OUT usertag fu RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 Program Tags MainProgram File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Hel
31. Shutter Speed 1500 Gain Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through autocalibration and is the recommended method for configuring this settings A higher value will increase the brightness of the image but the noise performance of the system is reduced Prior to configuring the gain the required shutter speed should be set and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting Lamera Settings D 64 Shutter Speed 2500 Shutter Speed This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical If an object is moving fast and a slow shutter speed is selected blurring or smearing of the object will occur As shutter speed is increased the amount of light required or gain needed has to be increased since the pixels exposure time has decreased B Camera Settings aain z Shutter Speed 1500 gt 30 150000 r QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 Camera Setup Illumination Type Standard QX Hawk Only Mode Configures the illumination pattern Bright Field is used for most applications For Mode 4 the internal illumination is always off similar to configuration setting 0 Always Off llumination Type Brightness Mode 3 Mode 4 Internal LEDs Off Brightness Configures the amount of illumination output
32. To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled To turn the targeting pattern off quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 117 I O Parameters Four Beeps Hold down button until four beeps are heard Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Ca
33. cycle E8 Capture Mode Continuous Humber of Captures FR apid Capture Rapid Capture Mode Continuous Rapid Capture In a rapid capture mode one or multiple captures can taken at an interval specified by the time delay between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is the integration and transfer timing Continuous Capture In continuous capture mode captures are continually taken throughout the read cycle in a multi buffered format so that we start processing the first image while we are capturing the second Continuous capture mode will override the pre processing field this improves performance in the multi buffered format This mode operation as laser scanners have historically operated with captures spanning the entire read cycle duration until an exit condition occurs such as qualification or timeout Number of Captures Specifies the number of captures to process in the rapid capture mode This parameter is used in conjunction with the time delay between captures parameters to specify the capture sequence of a rapid capture read cycle B Capture Mode Continuous Number of Captures Rapid Capture Mode Timed Capture ra 1 64 Dependent on image size Rapid Capture Mode B Capture Mode Continuous Number of Captures 1 Rapid Capture Mode Timed Capture Timed Capture QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 55 Read Cycle Timed Capture Capture even
34. detector beam causes a change in 7 the trigger state which initiates the Object a read cycle detector Initiate Second Read Cycle Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another change in the trigger state This sig nal initiates a new read cycle and Object ends the previous read cycle unless detector T Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent External Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the End of Read Cycle Mode setting a timeout or new trigger occurs 5 46 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Serial Data Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred In Serial Data the imager accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here
35. most recent QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 165 Matchcode Matchcode tree control tabs Parameters Parameters ESP Values Mabchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String i Mismatch Replace Replacement String MATH Disabled ated To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the Then click the Matchcode tab to display the Matchcode tree control The indicates that the setting is the default Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Matchcode section of Appendix E 5 166 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Overview of Matchcode Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the imager s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols
36. s Unused ECC value QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters 5 161 Symbol Quality Grading Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled Percent Cell Damage The percent of symbol cells that are damaged Capture Time The amount of time the imager required to capture the area in which the symbol was located Locate Time The amount of time the imager required to locate the symbol Decode Time The amount of time the imager required to decode the symbol Pixels Per Element The average number of pixels in a symbol element ECC Level The level of error correction used when decoding the symbol Matrix Size The size of the symbol s matrix area the area composed of the symbol s elements Quiet Zone The size of the quiet zone around the symbol Symbol Angle The angle at which the symbol is printed or marked 5 162 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Report Tab The Report tab allows the user to initiate Data Matrix Grading and to generate and save grading reports To save the report as a PDF file an HTML file a CSV file or an RTF file click the Save Report button Reports appear in the viewing area underneath the Data Matrix Grading and Save Report buttons ESE ESP Untitled Fie Model
37. settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Click this button for a list of ESP Click Generate Barcode to display the Bar Code configuration settings that are Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing different than default settings the required configuration commands I Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences from Default Differences Waster Database Firmware Generate Bar Code Command lt K200 35 gt lt K220 50 gt KA f4h2o lt K810 3 lt 811 13 lt Ke1l2 2 gt Description Mode External Edge Read Cycle Timeout 50 Code 128 Edge to Edgel Output On No Read Output On Good Read HM atch Output On Mismatch Send configuration settings to the imager without saving by clicking Send to Reader Click Save As to save the Send configuration settings to the report as plain text or a imager and save in ESP by clicking tab delimited text file Send and Save e To create a Barcode symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate e To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As e Click Send and Save to send
38. un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 e Connect the Ethernet Cable from B on the QX Hawk to the network e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QxX 1 e Connect the power supply to A on the QX Hawk e Plug in the power supply 10 e TT I Common my oy Common 12 pin Plug 12 pin Plug Host to 12 pin Socket to 12 pin Ethernet 8 pin Host Serial 12 pin Socket to DB9 ia 3 Socket Plug to RJ45 5 mu 2 PL as 2 Pa azs One One Power Supply Y Power Supply 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor 6 8 6 8 Serial Standalone with QX 1 Ethernet Standalone with QX 1 1 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start QX Hawk C Mount Important When connecting Ultra Lock cordsets to the QX Hawk C Mount and QX 1 align the pins first and then push the connector into place Do not twist the connectors as this will bend the pins Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain RS 232 e Connect the Serial Communication Cable from A on the QX Hawk C Mount to 2 on the QX 1 e Connect the host cable from 1 on the QX 1 to the host computer e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QxX 1 e Connect the power supply to 3 on the QX 1 e Plug in the power
39. wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Options 1 to 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 73 Serial Commands Symbology Type Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type ength wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 Pharmacode 10 GS1 DataBar 11 MicroPDF417 12 Composite 13 BC412 14 Data Matrix 15 QR Code Length Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 to 128 Wildcard Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0x2A Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Placeholder Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default Ox3F Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters A 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Data Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Decode Direction Serial Cmd l
40. 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires 5 154 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 E Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Oukput on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Frink Growth Disabled Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled Output on Unused ECE Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade 7 Print Growth Threshold Grade Z Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Grade Z Unused ECC Threshold Grade Z Output on Symbol Contrast The symbol contrast is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled ka Disabled Enabled Output on Print Growth The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Print Growth Disabled w izabled Enabled Output on Axial Non Uniformity The axial non uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled al izabled Enabled Output On Unused ECC The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value tI cu EE T a 4 Gutpuet on Unused ECC izabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 155 I O Parameters Symbol Contrast Threshold This is the grade to use as
41. 2 EtherNet IP V EtherNet IP Symbol Data Diagnostic Data 2 Diagnostic Data V R5232 4 V RS5232 4 Service Status v R5232 B 7 R5232 B R5422 R5422 7 TCP Port 1 v TCP Port 1 TCP Port 2 V TCP Port 2 V EtherNet IP Send Settings Send and Save Send Settings Send and Save QX Hawk C Mount Primary Secondary Port Routing Primary Secondary Port Routing Command Data Extended Data i TI RS232A Command Data JI R5232 A Extended Data JI RS232 B Database Identifier Output 7 R5232 B Read Duration Output _ J R5422 EAN RS422 Symbology Identifier Z TCP Port 1 mealea 7 TCP Port 1 i Extended Data z V TCP Port 2 Diagnostic Data V TCP Port 2 EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Symbol Data Diagnostic Data Di tic Dat 7 R5232 A FI RS232 A it ic a a tat 7 R5232 B FIRS 2228 ervice Status R5422 R5422 TCP Port 1 TCP Port 1 TCP Port 2 TCP Port 2 V EtherNet IP Send Settings Send and Save Send Settings Send and Save QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 3 Communication Port Routing Advantages e Data can be routed in on one port and out on the same port or a different port like a switch or router Transparent Mode Half Duplex Mode Full Duplex Mode and Custom Mode e External Data Routing still follows the To From Host Aux paradigm The new capability allows the customer to define the data direction which port behaves as the Host Port and whi
42. 2 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the imager The default setting is 2003 Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet 25 200 00 Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TCP Port 1 O01 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Se TCF Port 2 2003 2 1024 65535 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 2 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Search and Configure Mode Enabled Disabled Enabled Timed Window Search and Configure Mode is intended primarily f
43. 4 RS 422 485 TxD 3 Terminated B Serial Models M12 12 pin Socket Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Terminated Green 4 Input 1 Yellow 5 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray 6 Port 3 422 485 RxD Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 Port 2 TxD Port 1 RTS Black 10 Port 2 RxD Port 1 CTS Violet 11 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray Pink 12 Port 3 422 485 RxD Red Blue A 12 TX 7 Terminated SEED an oe a 3 Terminated B oe Models M12 8 pin Socket Function Terminated Terminated Terminated TX RX TX Terminated RX TX l Ni amp a A ojn 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices QX 1 Connectors Connector T on the QX 1 Interface Device is the Trigger connector Connectors 1 2 and 3 can be used to bus power and data as required by the application The connectors on the QX 1 interface device physically mirror those on the QX Hawk imager but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 connectors take on the communications and power roles that are assigned to them Trigger 4 _ 10 28V Trigger New Master 2 2 Trigger New Master Input 1 Common Input 1 Common QX 1 Tri c i 3 Ground rigger connector 4 Trigger 4 pin Socket Power Switch Trigger Switch
44. AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes 0 0 FA MainRouting New Tag Ctri w 3 Unscheduled Progra Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Edit Tags Add On Instructions Data Types Gi User Defined Export Tags Verify E OXHawk_comm E QXHawk_devic to QXHawk_external_inputs w QXxHawk_external_outputs QXHawk_IN_big_udt 0 QXHawk_IN_small_udt K QXHawk_IO_big_udt Ei QXHawk_IO_small_udt K QXHawk_OUT_udt 5j a Strings id strize A sted i STRING Print a lt vr gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags lt Monitor 4 tag collection a lt gt 20 Expand the QXHawk_IO_big_pt so that the IN and OUT structures and values are visible f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 1 61 Program Tags MainProgram File Edit view Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help X Balsu S e lt amp ial aall Rem Run FB Run Mode E T H Pon ae er Path ear ETHIPIMOIOS 23BecksieneO Wa No Forces b paler lt attery 7 T wee E 1 0 0K 4 Hi iallk gt 4 gt Favorites 2 ON arms Dit Timer Counter m h EE TimeriCourter_ Controller MscanLogix5561 Scope Eg MainProgram Show Show All Controller Tags r ele j sf a Controller Fault Handler Name amp Value Style Data Type Description Power Up Handler QXHawk_IO_big_pt GXHawk_IO_big_udt _ Tasks s
45. AIM LED display gt Green Flash LED lt K750 LED status targeting status green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 comm bar graph O 1 1 O 2 gt EZ Trax Output lt K75 7 status port image mode image format image quality object info enable grade enable gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 first beep second beep third beep fourth beep gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output Trend Analysis Output 2 on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 ee qt of triggers number to output QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 58 Appendices Diagnostics Output 1 lt K790 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 unused service unit gt lt K800 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Symbol Quality Output 1 Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt lt K801 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output o
46. Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send the command additional times 6 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Move to Start Default Macros Add Macro Net Row Read Rate decode sec Read Rate percent End Read Rate telp press FL Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or Default Macros Click on subsequent Row to see When macros are defaulted the entire arrows to edit macros the next row macro set is restored to the original macro of macros commands Click a macro button to execute it in the Terminal If the macro is a command it is sent to the imager at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro Click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit to display the following dialog Macro Entry Macro Name Read Rate percent Macro Value lt C p gt Edit the macro value or type a new Macro Name in the text field provided and define it in the Macro Value field Click OK to save the entry QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 6 5 Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy Paste Clear Select All Save Change Font Change Echo Font j Enable Echo j Change Background Color F Mon Printable Characte
47. Configure energy saving settings for your computer Shows installed printers and Fax printers and helps you add new ones Customize settings for the display of languages numbers times and dates Add remove and configure scanners and cameras Schedule computer tasks to run automatically View your current security status and access important settings SoundMA4 Control Panel Change the sound scheme for your computer or configure the settings for your speakers and recording devices Change settings for text to speech and for speech recognition if installed See information about your computer system and change settings for hardware performance and automatic updates Customize the Start Menu and the taskbar such as the types of items to be displayed and how they should appear Change user account settings and passwords For people who share this computer Configure the Windows Firewall Set up or add to a wireless network For your home or office Connects to other computers networks and the Internet 2 The Network Connections dialog will appear Double click the icon for the Local Area Connection being used in the application Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qx gt i JO Search E gt Folders FF Address Network Connections Network Tasks E Create a new connection Change Windows Firewall settings Disable this network device amp Repair this connection il
48. Data Size 5 Populate Originator gt Target OUT with 12 and Target gt Originator Big IN with 176 hdd Classi Connection Type Data Size Rate Trigger Destination Priority Cont H Originator gt T arget Data Size 12 W Aunldle Header T arget gt Originator Data Size 174 Rundldle Header Cancel Alternately Target gt Originator could be set to 84 for the Small IN assembly 6 Select Rate and set packet rate to 20 milliseconds in both directions hdd Classi Connection Type Data Size Fate Trigger Destination Priority Cont H Packet Rate in milliseconds Originator Target Target Originator Production Inhibit Timeout in milliseconds Originator Target Target gt Originator Cancel A 116 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 Select Destination Appendices 8 Populate Originator gt Target OUT with 198 and Target gt Originator Big IN 101 hdd Class Connection Configuration Connection Instance 1 r riginator gt Target Specify Connection Point or Tag m Target gt Onginator Specify Connection Point or Tag hol Connection Tag Connection Fair Connection Tag Connection Paint Cancel Alternately Target gt Originator could be set to 100 for the Small IN assembly 9 Click OK and the io data windows will show up in the main area below QX Hawk 10
49. Default NOREAD Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Input 1 Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Reset Counts 2 Unlatch Output Active State Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Active Open Options 0 Active Open 1 Active Closed Green Flash LED Standard QX Hawk Only Green Flash Mode Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe Green Flash Duration Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10 ms increments QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 61 Serial Commands Status Indicators Serial Cmd Default Options Bar Graph Serial Cmd Default Options I O 1 Serial Cmd Default Options I O 2 Serial Cmd Default Options lt K751 status bar graph I O 1 1 O 2 gt 1 PHY Activity 0 Disabled 1 PHY Activity 2 Protocol Activity lt K751 status bar graph O 1 1 O0 2 gt 1 Read Rate Good Read 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate Good Read 2 Symbol Grade lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt 1 Output Active 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Active lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 I O 2 gt 2 Input Active 0 Disabled 1 Output Activ
50. Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 139 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output Stabe Hormally Open Pulse width 0 500 L Seconds Output Mode Pulse Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 2 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Oukput Mode Pulse Pulse Latch Mode 7 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met a
51. Echo from asm OUT 0xC6 U32 Command Echo 32 bit flags Echo from asm OUT OxC6 2 U32 Output Control Echo 32 bit flags Echo from asm OUT 0xC6 3 ne flags 1 External Input Status Physical Pin State 4 ie 1 External Output Status Physical Pin State 32 bit flags U32 5 32 bit flags 1 Device Status Read Cycle Sequence Counter When this value changes it indicates the following read cycle report fields have changed 6 U32 1 0 Read cycle report has been reset to empty Read cycle report data is only valid when Sequence is not 0 7 U32 1 Read cycle report Trigger count lt T gt 8 j U32 1 Read cycle report Decode Match count lt V gt 9 jU32 1 Read cycle report Mismatch count lt X gt 10 U32 1 Read cycle report Noread count lt N gt Read cycle report Decoded Data 11 STRING 32 U32 Us 128 YP to 128 8 bit chars The first U32 is the length of the bar code data in the U8 128 field Total 176 U8 or 44 U32 This contains more status information and a longer bar code string than the Small IN Assembly 0x64 This gives the PLC visibility of the device s discrete io current operational status and read cycle counters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 93 Using EtherNet IP User Defined Tag Echo Command Echo Output Control Echo These are a direct echo of the equivalent fields in the OUT assembly They provide the PLC programmer with a method of verifying that the OUT data ha
52. Hawk Sub sampling Disabled w 4 1 1 pixel output for every 4 pixels sampled When selected the image will be sampled 2 1 in the vertical direction and 2 1 in the horizontal direction for a combined 4 1 ratio An image with a dimension of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 320 x 240 16 1 1 pixel output for every 16 pixels sampled When selected the image will be sampled 4 1 in the vertical direction and 4 1 in the horizontal direction for a combined 16 1 ratio An image with a dimension of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 160 x 120 4 11 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Camera Setup CMOS WVGA Window of Interest El Window of Interest Top T Left j Height 450 width foe The active pixel area of the image sensor is defined as the Window of Interest WOI This allows the user to select an area in the Field of View that the desired symbol will be located The programmable window of interest is useful for increasing decode speed improving threshold selecting desired symbol from multiple symbols in FOV The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size in both rows and columns to define the Window of Interest Important Notes e The column width value is required to be a modulus 32 value so regardless of the column width setting that is configured the actual column width will be decreased if required to a modulus 32 value For example a column width value of 632 would actually be 608
53. Imager User s Manual 1 23 Default Reset Save Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM This allows a user essentially to create a back up set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default jumper the default pin to ground does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ Button default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an lt Arc gt or lt Zrc gt command Restore Customer Defaults Use the EZ Button to default the scanner by holding it down while applying power to the scanner if this feature is enabled Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with the lt Ard gt command or recalled and saved for power on with the lt Zrd gt command Hardware Default If a software
54. In the I O menu select Run mode so that there is a check mark next to it is EIPScan ElPscan gxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request fle Stack Device IO Module Help Dow Add Device Target Network Path MO ere a Adapter fio Request all fields are in hex Configure Assembly ElPScan Test Tool 8 Host 10 10 4 130 Instance hex 301 Attribute hex 3 Member hex Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Da 26 f9 10 10 5 234 Symbol Tag Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 OO 00 00 00 MMIII 00 00 00 00 00 Oc 00 00 00 31 32 33 34 35 36 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 00 0100 00 00 A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO 00 OO 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO 00 00 00 v 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 12 13 50 983 12 16 15 33 12 49 11 174 13 58 38 950 14 02 38 790 14 12 56 270 14 22 18 610 12 13 31 755 12 13 41 750 Connection closed with Instance 1 Connection closed with Instance 1 Connection closed with Instance 1 Error Request failed Target is not responding Error Request Failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 18 20 45 53A 9 Cannertinn rinsed with Instance 1 1 Classi connections active Max Recy Delay 8 msec
55. K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 200 x10 ms 2 seconds Options 0 65535 Array Communication Modes Mode Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Daisy Chain Source Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain 1 d gt Default 1 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector B Options 0 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX Hawk Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Daisy Chain ID Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 Options One or two ASCII characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 41 Serial Commands Read Cycle Trigger Trigger Filter Duration lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing edge trigger filter duration gt Serial Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222
56. K525 gt The imager comes with a default focal curve based on unit averages When this isn t close enough to obtain all distances the lt OPTIC gt command can be used to start a 2 point test to normalize the focal distance and improve accuracy This should generally be done with lenses that were not originally shipped with the imager Important lt K525 gt is not supported by the QX Hawk C Mount Imager The table below shows the setting and test requirements to improve distance parameter accuracy Lens Type and Command Inside Test Requirements Outside Test Requirements lt K525 1 gt UHD 15 ee Data Matrix To Data Matrix lt K525 2 gt HD 30 A A i Data Matrix TOE Data Matrix lt K525 3 gt SD 45 oe Data Matrix eo Data Matrix 7 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling the imager s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Utilities Serial a Function Cmd ESP EZ Button Save to Reader 3 5 Reset Will not save for power on lt A gt Send No Save No V gt x Reset and Recall Microscan Default o S g Barameters lt Ard gt Send lt Ard gt from Terminal No X E Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arp gt Send lt Arp gt from Terminal No u Reset and Recall Customer Default lt Arc gt Send Are trom Terminal No Parameters Sa
57. Knnn gt Single Descriptor Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnnd gt Single Command Default This request will default a single K command to original factory parameters 7 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Learn Operations Learn Sending the lt LEARN gt command from ESP s Terminal will put the imager into a mode of operation that will cause it to learn the next Data Matrix symbol decoded This mode of operation will remain active until either a Data Matrix symbol is decoded or the call is made to disable the mode and revert back to normal operation Upon decoding a Data Matrix symbol the image processing will save pertinent information regarding the target symbol to allow it to be processed more quickly and consistently The data collected by the Learn operation can be saved for a Power On condition by sending the lt Z gt command Unlearn Sending the lt UNLEARN gt command will cause the imager to discard any information acquired during a Learn operation The Unlearn state can be saved for a Power On condition by sending the lt Z gt command Learn Status Sending the lt LEARN gt request will return the current status of Learn operations Responses are sent in this
58. Learned state information and the imager will power on in its configured state e A QX Hawk is saved in a Learning state The imager will power on in the Learning state and will learn the first Data Matrix symbol decoded e A QX Hawk is saved in a Learned state The imager will power on in the Learned state and will only decode the learned symbol type e A QX Hawk in a Learned state is issued a reset default command lt Ard gt The unit will return to an Unlearned state but if power is cycled it will return to its saved state QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 3 Video Select Lens Standard QX Hawk Only This value must reflect the correct camera lens currently installed on the product This value is configured after leaving the factory However since the lens can be changed by the user this parameter needs to be updated to reflect the currently installed lens Click the Select Lens button on the Video tab To verify lens type turn off power to the QX Hawk do not look into the targeting laser Then look at the outer rim of the unit s camera lens The following markings define the correct Lens Type parameter value lt and 15 Lens Type 1 2 and 30 Lens Type 2 a and 45 Lens Type 3 When a lens is changed on the QX Hawk the user can optimize the accuracy of the Focal Distance parameter by using the lt OPTIC gt command Important lt OPTIC gt is not supported by the QX Ha
59. Maint Clear Faults i a M Go To Faults choose one CPS for IN and OUT _small_pt or _big_pt Controller Properties UnscheduiecProgra H S Motion Groups E Ungrouped Axes 3 Add On Instructions 5 8 Data Types 5 A User Defined Eil QxHawk_command AL Synchronous Copy File Source QXHawek Dest XHavwk_lO_big_pt IN te QXHawk_device_status tio QXHawk_external_inputs Synchronous Copy File to QXHawk_external_outputs Source QXHaywk_lO_big_pt OUT i OXHawk_IN_big_udt a Dest QXHawk O A OXHawk_IN_small_udt Length 1 K QXHawk_IO_big_udt E QxHawk_I0_small_udt i QxHawk_OUT_udt 5 bar Strings R strize A sted i STRING se lt zili MainRoutine MainPrograr lt i Download using current communications path Rung 1 of 2 APP VER 18 Once the program has downloaded make sure the PLC is in Run Mode i RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit view Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alela a S a gels ie Ble mE ws 23 NoForces Go Offline No Edits toad a aserre Atle a Ea gt Redundancy A E 4 gt h Favorites Add On Alarms Timer Counter E Controller Contr Contr Program Mode Run Mode Powe Test Mode g MainProgram MainRoutine 5 6 Tasks a _ S panj Cear Els a seele aeda wed wll E ad ol i a M Go To Faults choose one CPS for IN and OUT _small_pt or _big_pt
60. Mode button to make configuration changes to the imager The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons at the top of the screen gt 9 wy amp yy EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recw Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities e Click the EZ Mode button to return to EZ Mode e Click the Autoconnect button to establish communication e Click the Send Recv button to send or receive commands e Click the Switch Model button to open the model menu or to return to a previous model e Click the Parameters button to show the tabbed tree controls for Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics e Click the Setup button to access the Camera Setup tree control and the tabbed interfaces for Video Evaluation Calibration Window of Interest WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format and Dynamic Setup e Click the Terminal button to display decoded symbol data and to send serial commands to the imager using text or macros e Click the Utilities button to show the tabbed interfaces for Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences from Default Master Database and Firmware For further details see ESP Help in the dropdown Help menu Quick Stark Help N About ESF Contacting Microscan 1 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 11 Save Changes To make changes to configuration
61. Modifier character Character l Code 39 Only 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes 7 Enabled Disabled Yes Example A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies e For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 e For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 5 96 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Parameters Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the I O tab to display the I O Parameters tree control Parameters ESP Values I O Parameters H Symbol Gata Gukpuk aood Read H Wo Read Message Enabled 4 Read Duration Gutput Disabled H Output Object Info Disabled Output Indicators W Serial Verification 4 EZ Trax Output Disabled 4 Ez Button Enabled W Status Indicators PHY Activity Calibration Options Database Identifier Qutput Disabled The indicates E that the setting lt i o E Eon H Output 1 Parameters H Output 2 Parameters Reset Counts Output 3 Parameters Unlatch Output i Quality Output To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the opt
62. No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On D 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 153 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger D 0 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold
63. Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unik Disabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 157 I O Parameters Quality Output Quality Output Duality Output Separator i Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Output Disabled Quality Output Separator The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data Quality Qutpuk Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status r Decode Direction Output MULI SOH ST ETs EQT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF vT FF cR sof si DLE pc DC2 DC3 DC4 NA SYN ETB Can EM suB ESc Fs GS RS us SP Click Delete to remove characters Decodes per Trigger Status When Enabled the imager enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the imager outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Quality Output Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status D
64. PH A ctivity x Io Protocol Actrvit Disabled When set to Disabled the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs are always off Note All green and red LEDs will turn on briefly during power on or reset to confirm that they are functioning PHY Activity If Ethernet is available LNK Solid green when transceiver is linked ACT Blinking green when transceiver detects Tx or Rx activity Otherwise for all RS232 and RS422 485 activity LNK Blinking green with Tx data activity ACT Blinking green with Rx data activity Note Red is never turned on Protocol Activity If EtherNet IP is enabled MOD Module status per EtherNet IP specification NET Network status per EtherNet IP specification Otherwise the MOD and NET LEDs are always off QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 119 I O Parameters Bar Graph Read Rate Auto Calibration Bar Code Configuration and Read Cycle Result all share the Bar Graph 20 100 LEDs Status Indicators PHY Activity EEE NE Read Rate Good Read NO 1 Disabled Tia Read Rate Good Read Symbol Grade I O 1 I O 1 always shows the combined state of the discrete outputs If any output is active the I O 1 LED will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate I output Active Tia I O 2 I O 2 always shows the state of the hardware input trigger If the trigger is active I O 2 will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Gr
65. Plug Ultralock to DB9 Socket 3M 61 000165 02 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug Screw on to DBY Socket 3M 61 000163 01 Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug Ultralock to RJ45 3M 61 000163 02 Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug Screw on to RJ45 3M 61 000160 01 Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug Ultralock to RJ45 1M 61 000160 02 Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug Screw on to RJ45 1M 61 000161 01 Cordset M12 12 pin Plug Ultralock to MS 5100 3M 61 000161 02 Cordset M12 12 pin Plug Screw on to MS 5100 3M 61 000172 01 Cordset M12 12 pin Plug Ultralock to M12 12 pin Socket Ultralock to DB25 Plug 61 000158 03 Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug amp Socket Ultralock to MS Connect 210 RS 232 2M 61 000158 04 Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug amp Socket Ultralock to MS Connect 210 RS 422 485 2M A 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices 61 000166 01 Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug Ultralock to Flying Leads 3M 61 000166 02 Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug Screw on to Flying Leads 3M 61 000167 01 61 000167 02 61 000207 01 FIS 0210 0001G FIS 0210 0002G FIS 0210 0003G FIS 0210 0004G 98 000013 04 Cordset M12 12 Pin Socket Ultralock to Flying Leads 3M Cordset M12 12 Pin Socket Screw on to Flying Leads 3M Cordset C Mount to Smart Series Light MS Connect 210 Connectivity Box with Display M
66. Port in an un polled mode Scanner Other Devices ee j zi Exiernal Data System Data 4 Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed e 5 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Full Duplex Mode When Full Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Disabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data is not echoed back to itself e Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode e Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received e Source Port data is always sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble e Symbol data is not sent to the Source Port e Destination port data is echoed to the source port in an un polled mode Scanner External Data System Data 4 Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed Custom Mode Custom allows for user defined communication Ambles to Source Echo to Source Output at
67. Rate Read Rate indicates the number of successful decodes per second achieved by the imager Test Read Rate by ESP 1 Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test Test Stop Decodes per Second Contrast lf a symbol has been successfully decoded its data and related information will be presented in the field below the image display window While the symbol is being decoded the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the top of the unit 2 Click the Stop button to end the Read Rate test Note Read rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities Test Read Rate by EZ Button 1 To start the Read Rate test hold down the EZ Button about three seconds until you hear three short beeps The 20 40 and 60 LEDs will illuminate While the symbol is being decoded the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the top of the unit 100 CJ m l I EZ Button 60 CG 40 HH 20 C These LEDs represent the percentage of Good Reads per images captured 2 To end the Read Rate test press the EZ Button and quickly release Test Read Rate by Serial Command You can also start a test with the lt C gt or lt Cp gt command and end it with the lt J gt command QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 15 Configure the Imager Step 10 Configure the Imager Click the App
68. Start Position m Match Length i 1 3000 Wild Card r Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Skep l Hew Master Pin Disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 169 Matchcode Wild Card Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol Mabchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position Match Length 5 170 Wild Card ee J Sequence on Wo Read Sequence on Mismatch NUL SH ST ET EQT ENG Sequence Step Mew Master Pin ACK BEL Pe PF Par FF LA SU SI DLE Dc DC2 Dc3 Dc NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESL FS GS RS US SF Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Sequence on No Read Parameters Sequence on No Read is useful when the imager needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the imager sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Matchcode Matchcode Ty
69. TCP Port 2 O03 Symbol Data Qukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Gateway Parameters Enter the Gateway address of the imager in this field Ethernet IP Address Subnet IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Gukpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Enabled 192 166 0 100 FES Foe 0 0 0 0 LIAL 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 17 Communication IP Address Mode Determines how the imager s IP address will be defined Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IF Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TEF Port 2 Symbol Data Gubpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Static Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled Enabled Command OOS Enabled Enabled Enabled Command In Static Mode the imager uses the user defined IP address entered in ESP DHCP In DHCP Mode the imager automatically acquires the IP address Subnet and Gateway addresses from a DHCP or BOOTP serv
70. Test routines There is also a focal distance adjustment tool to the right of the video view Video also features simple Capture and Decode functionality video Evaluation Calibration WOl Configuration Database Ordered Output Initiates Calibration routine Yen pattem and initiates live video display of the symbol in the field of view Allows the user to take an Initiates the Test routine image capture of the Allows the user to test the symbol in the field of view imagers read rate and at any time and to decodes per second and also decode the symbol data displays decoded symbol data similar to the Capture in the field at the bottom of the and Decode function in screen Click Stop to end the the Configuration views Test routine Capture and Decode Decodes per Second Contrast Attibute When enabled shows the Number of Symbols symbol in higher contrast Symbol 1 than the default contrast Symbol Data value When Decodes per Second is checked the read rate test displays how many decodes the imager achieves each second instead of displaying a percentage Initiates Data Matrix Leam operation ee ric toured Initiates Select a Activates the imagers target Reader Optics dialog Clicking this icon enables the focal distance slide control to the right of the video view The focal distance value is displayed just below the icon Symbol data and Tes
71. Y Modem Transfer Options cccccccsecccceeccceeeceeceeceeseeceseeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeseuceeseueeeseueessuaeessaaeetsaaes 7 32 This section explains the function and purpose of serial utility commands which are generally performed during imager operation QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Note For a list of all K commands see Serial Commands Type Command Name Bar Code Configuration Enter Bar Code Configuration i i lt CAL gt Calibrate Calibration lt OPTIC gt Initiate Lens Calibration Standard QX Hawk only lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter Counter lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset lt A gt Software Reset Retain Current Parameters lt Ard gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults lt Arp gt Software Reset Recall Power On Defaults lt Arc gt Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults Default Reset Save lt Z gt Software Reset Save Current Settings for Power On lt Zc gt Software Reset Save Current Settings as Customer Defaults lt Zrd gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults and Save for Power On lt ZRDall gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defau
72. a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade L w Print Growth Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Print Growth grade is under the threshold Print Growth Threshold Grade C w Axial Non Uniformity Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Axial Non Uniformity grade is under the threshold Axial Mon uniformiky Threshold Unused ECC Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Unused ECC grade is under the threshold Barade C ka Unused ECC Threshold 5 156 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click
73. associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System Default When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled To turn the targeting pattern off quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 115 I O Parameters Two Beeps Hold down button until two beeps are heard Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Default Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On
74. cR si DLEf oct Dea Dca NAK SYN ETB EM sue Esc _Fs 65 US _SP Click Delete to remove characters Supplementals Type As required by symbology used in application Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Supplementals Type Both we Both Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid Two Digits Only two character supplementals will be considered valid Five Digits Only five character supplementals will be considered valid 5 80 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters UPC E as UPC A When disabled the imager will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the imager will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification UFPC E as UFC Disabled i 2g b e d x Enabled 5 81 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Symbologies Code 93 Used in some clinical applications Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Code 93 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 10 Fi
75. character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar Omnidirectional lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed length status fixed symbol length gt Camera Setup Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Focus Distance lt K525 focal distance distance units lens type gt Illumination Standard QX Hawk Only lt K539 mode brightness gt Camera Settings lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Sub Sampling lt K542 sub sampling gt Morphological Pre Processing lt K550 status gt Morphological Operations lt K551 unused operation size gt External Illumination Mode lt K553 mode gt I O Parameters Calibration Options Standard QX Hawk lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type window of interest framing window of interest margin gt Calibration Options QX Hawk C Mount Serial Verification Beeper lt K529 gain shutter soeed unused symbol type unused unused gt lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output sym
76. check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Output Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 48 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol leng
77. command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt and gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Mon Delirmited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Mon Detimited Ox00 NUL Character Delimited Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Serial Trigger Character Delimited Start Character Mon Delimite AP Stop Character Mon Delimite SOH STX ETX EOT ENG ACK BEL 65 a a vT FF cr so si Duel De1 oc De3 DC4 NAk SYN ETB CAN Em subj Esc FS GS RS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Note Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge trigger mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to function QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 49 Read Cycle Start Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and
78. decode a symbol but rather to optimize for the fastest shutter speed that still provides good image quality 5 122 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Focus Position Standard QX Hawk Only Since the focus can be configured by simply entering the target distance value from the imager normally the user will configure the focus without requiring calibration However if it is necessary to calibrate the focus distance there are two methods to accommodate this task E Calibration Options ain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate t Symbol Type Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Calibrate Window of Interest Margin 75 Don t Calibrate The focus position is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Calibrate The focus position will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance This method is a simply Search method that tries to identify the desired focus through a search algorithm that cycles through focus settings with a configuration of camera settings to try and locate as quickly as possible the desired focus This is accomplished when a symbol is decoded Once a focus distance has been located that will successfully decode a symbol the algorithm will fine tune the search to locate the inside and outside focal distances The final focus distance is selected as the focus distance that is in the center of these two values This method c
79. decoded the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Separator Status Disabled izabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 79 Symbologies Separator Character As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command from ESP s Terminal will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Separator Character NUL SoH sTx ETX EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LF vr FF
80. enabled Otherwise the original WOI configuration will be retained B Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate w Window of Interest Margin Don t Calibrate Row and Column Aow Column Don t Calibrate The Window of Interest is not modified after the completion of Calibration 5 124 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Row and Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest will be modified to frame the symbol plus an addition margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI margin parameter Row If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest rows will be modified to horizontally frame the symbol plus an addition margin determined by the WOI margin parameter Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest columns will be modified to vertically frame the symbol plus an addition margin determined by the WOI margin parameter Window of Interest Margin Sets the margin size that is applied to the calibrated label and is specified in number of pixels If margin causes image to exceed maximum image size it will be reduced accordingly E Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate
81. enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range Range Mode Status Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 74 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Codabar Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with start stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Symbol Length 1 64 Start and Stop Match Status When disabled the imager will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When enabled the imager will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Start and Stop Output Status When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as
82. for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers Number to Output On Ho Fead Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Tri
83. format lt LEARN 0 gt Default symbol has not been learned lt LEARN 1 gt Learn operation in progress lt LEARN 2 gt Symbol has been learned Learn Persistence The learn state and parameters persist in the same way as ordinary parameters Examples e A QX Hawk in a Learned state has not been saved Cycling power will remove any Learned state information and the imager will power on in its configured state e A QX Hawk is saved in a Learning state The imager will power on in the Learning state and will learn the first Data Matrix symbol decoded e A QX Hawk is saved in a Learned state The imager will power on in the Learned state and will only decode the learned symbol type e A QX Hawk in a Learned state is issued a reset default command lt Ard gt The unit will return to an Unlearned state but if power is cycled it will return to its saved state QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 27 Reboot System Reboot System Sending a lt reboot gt command from ESP s Terminal will cold reboot the system starting from Boot Code 7 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Static Validation Sending a lt VAL gt command from ESP s Terminal will cause the imager to perform a static validation operation and will output validation results to the Terminal Output Screen Data Matrix validation information is output in the format below in response to the lt VAL gt command Note If
84. from the unit s built in lighting Illumination Type Bright Field Medium High 4 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup External Smart Light QX Hawk C Mount Only Always On Always Off On onli when m Read Cycle Disabled When External Smart Light is set to Disabled the external smart light control is disabled and Output 3 is available for any other operation Always On When External Smart Light is set to Always On the external smart light is continuously on Always Off When External Smart Light is set to Always Off the external smart light is continuously off On Only When in Read Cycle When External Smart Light is set to On Only When in Read Cycle the external smart light will be on when the imager is in an active read cycle Important Note The external smart light s active state is controlled through the Output State of Output 3 which is used as the external control line To control the external light using a Microscan standard 12 pin to 5 pin external light control cable set Output 3 s Output State to Normally Closed and Output Common to ground Any other settings that relate to Output 3 such as Output 3 Diagnostics will be ignored if this mode is enabled The external light will be continuously on until the system is fully re booted QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 9 Camera Setup Focus Distance Provides focal distance adjustment for the camera When Distance
85. gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disabled Enabled Important Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow or Narrow Enhanced Quiet Zone enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow quiet zone 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap 5 66 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled izabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start and stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length Symbol Length 1 64 Full ASCII Set Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus
86. lt n gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data and Edge Serial Data and Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the imager to the host In this mode the imager accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Trigger Filter Duration Note Trigger filter ranges from 32 0 us to 2 10 seconds Leading Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur Note 313 10ms Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Durati
87. master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters 1 3000 2 1500 3 1000 4 750 5 600 6 500 7 428 8 375 9 333 10 300 7 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Enter Master Symbol Data Allows the user to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed Enter data for 1 to 10 master symbols Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols to be created in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each master symbol number in the table type master symbol data in the popup dialog that appears and click OK 4 When all master symbol data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index T z 5 A Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 Master Symbol 5 Master 5 Symbol Data Enter master symbol da
88. number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character lt K229 start character gt Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Capture Mode lt K241 mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Capture Time lt K242 time before first capture time between 1 2 time between 2 3 time between 3 4 time between 4 5 time between 5 6 time between 6 7 time between 7 8 gt Store No Read Image lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Image Processing Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout gt Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Trigger Mode Filter Duration Trigger Mode Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 0 Continuous Read Options 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and Edge Leading Edge Trigger Filter Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us Trailing Edge Trigger Filter Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us Serial Trigger Character Delimited Serial Cmd lt K201 serial trigger character gt Default Space 0x20
89. of a vision system Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing Full Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output expressed in dB optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a bar code symbol Gradient The rate of change of pixel intensity first derivative Gray Scale Variations of values from white through shades of gray to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one A 124 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Half Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Histogram A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities gray levels of pixels in an image The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Image Projection of an object or scene onto a plane i e screen or image sensor Image Processing IP Transformation of an input image into an output image with desired properties Image Resolution The number of rows and columns of
90. pixels in an image A higher resolution means that more pixels are available per element of the symbol being read Examples 640 x 480 VGA 854 x 480 WVGA 1280 x 1024 SXGA 2048 x 1536 QXGA Image Sensor A device that converts a visual image to an electrical signal a CCD or CMOS array Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the imager s active memory Input A channel or communications line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device Integration Exposure of pixels on a CMOS sensor IP See Image Processing Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Lens A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which either converge or diverge light rays Machine Vision The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for controlling a specific activity Multidrop A communications protocol for networking two or more imagers or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and tra
91. read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Falling Edge A change of state to inactive associated with a level trigger Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA A semiconductor device containing programmable interconnects and logic components Fill Factor Percentage of pixel area used for light collection Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory ROM and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Focal Distance In camera based vision the distance from the front of the camera to the object being viewed In optics the distance from the lens to the focal plane Focal Plane Usually found at the image sensor it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus Focus Any given point in an image at which light converges the focal point FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array Frame The total area captured in an image sensor while the video signal is not blanked Frame Grabber A device that interfaces with a camera and on command samples the video converts the sample to a digital value and stores that in a computer s memory Front End System The object illumination optics and imager blocks
92. sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Options 0 to 3000 Match Length Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Options 1 to 3000 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 67 Serial Commands Wild Card Character Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default asterisk Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Sequence on No Read Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Master Symbol Database Size Serial Cmd lt K224 number of master symbols gt Default 1 Options 1 to 10 New Master Pin Serial Cmd lt K225 status gt Default 0 Disabled
93. settings in the tree controls Parameters ESP Values Communications R523 A RS232 B Enabled RS 422 Disabled Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled 1 Left click on the DESE Disabled eae me Preamble Characters desired tree 2 Double click on the Postarmble Enabled desired parameter and click once in the selection box to view options 3 Place the cursor in 4 Left click again on the 5 Right click on the open the selection box open screen to complete screen and select Save to scroll down to the the selection Reader to implement the setting you want to command in the imager change and click once on the setting Saving Options e Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the imager e Send and Save This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager for power on QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 17 Save Changes 1 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E 2 Using ESP Contents EZ NOUE eee Re ee ee ee eee ee ee 2 2 API NOOO emerge RE a rene eee eee et ee ae ee ee ee eee E eee 2 3 Kenn OOD AN ee tecoaceseecaecccacsecascecacancetameeceaundens stan uneteaecetesebssesereaspeateceeseceasdaeateeesaneeasmuesgncicscencaucevatas 2 4 Navigaung in E SP aseene aan nE N REE aE AS 2 15 Send Receive Options a cecc cancascccasaceces
94. supply Ethernet Note The QX Hawk C Mount does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 e Connect the Ethernet Cable from B on the QX Hawk C Mount to the network e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QX 1 e Connect the power supply to A on the QX Hawk C Mount e Plug in the power supply 10 P 0 0 Common Host Serial Common 12 pin Plug i l 12 pin Plug Host 12 pin Socket li to 12 pin Socket to 12 pin Ethernet 8 pin ee 3 Socket Plug to RJ45 2 you Power Supply ij i 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor Serial Standalone with QX 1 Ethernet Standalone with Qx 1 Power Supply 12 pin Socket QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 5 Position the Imager Step 3 Position the Imager e Position the imager at a focal distance of one inch or more from a test symbol e Tip the imager relative to the symbol if necessary to avoid the glare of direct Specular reflection e Symbols can be rotated tilted at any angle however for best results symbols should be aligned with the field of view In the case of linear symbols aligning the bars in the direction of their movement ladder orientation will minimize the chances of blurring and will result in more consistent
95. symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the imager can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 Full ASCII Set Disabled l 23 b E d x Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 67 Symbologies Code 128 Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with limited space and high security requirements A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters it is continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge Code 128 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 10 EAN Status Disabled Output Format Standard Application Record Separator Status Disabled Application Record Separator Char i Application Record Brackets Disabled Application Record Padding Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Symbol Length Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted This specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not
96. vi Shutter Speed Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Margin 75 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 121 I O Parameters Shutter Speed Unless an application is a static setup the shutter speed setting should be configured by the user based on their application For dynamic applications the user should configure the shutter speed setting so the calibration process can optimize the gain for that setting The following table illustrates a general guide line for shutter speed configurations for various line speeds Note This is a general guide line and depends on the scanners optical configuration and symbol element size E Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Calibrate Fast shutter Window of Interest Margin 75 Don t Calibrate The shutter speed is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Calibrate The shutter speed will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance Calibrate Fast Shutter The calibration process will concentrate on achieving the fastest possible shutter setting that still will still have good performance The image quality or contrast may not be as good as what would be achieved with the Enabled setting The calibration process is not designed to choose the fastest shutter speed that can
97. will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited Ly Ta Stark Character Mon Delimited Stop Character Hon Delimited z E sE i m E C7 l Eee qa alg Big EBRE se BBL ig B Click Delete to remove characters 5 50 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Stop Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and i
98. 0 0 gt e All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 27 Serial Commands Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string For example lt K145 1 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 7 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger enables Narrow Quiet Zone and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted send the Show Reader Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed M J enter lt K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt A 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Serial Configuration Commands The following serial commands can be entered through ESP s Terminal to control QX Hawk functions Detailed descriptions of command parameters are available in Parameters Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 statu
99. 0 050 1 27 1 to 23 5 25 to 597 1 3 33 18 3 465 3 8 97 19 483 CCD Modular Zoom Optics Inches mm Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge 0 002 0 05 0 0033 0 08 1 to 6 25 to 152 0 53 13 1 8 46 0 2 5 0 8 20 fee 0 005 0 13 0 0075 0 19 1 to 14 25 to 356 0 53 13 3 5 89 0 8 20 2 5 64 0 010 0 25 0 015 0 38 2 to 29 51 to 737 0 53 13 7 5 191 1 5 38 9 229 0 020 0 51 0 030 0 76 3 to 60 76 to 1 524 1 03 26 15 5 394 7 178 50 1 270 0 040 1 02 0 060 1 52 6 to 96 152 to 2 438 1 08 27 25 635 9 229 65 1 651 Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge 0 002 0 05 0 0033 0 08 1 to 3 25 to 76 0 83 21 1 8 46 0 4 10 0 8 20 30 0 005 0 13 0 0075 0 19 1 to 6 5 25 to 165 0 83 21 3 5 89 0 8 20 1 8 46 0 010 0 25 0 015 0 38 1 to 16 25 to 406 0 83 21 8 3 211 2 51 8 5 216 0 020 0 51 0 030 0 76 2 to 32 51 to 813 1 3 33 16 4 417 3 76 21 5 546 Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge ae 0 005 0 13 0 0075 0 19 1 to 5 25 to 127 1 3 33 4 1 104 1 5 38 2 51 0 010 0 25 0 015 0 38 1 to 9 5 25 to 241 1 3 33 7 5 191 2 51 6 152
100. 1 1 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 2 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 3 S 115 13 S 20 14 DC4 4 T 116 14 t 21 15 NAK 5 U 117 15 u 22 16 SYN 6 V 118 76 V 23 17 ETB T W 119 TT W 24 18 CAN 8 X 120 78 X 25 19 EM 9 yY 121 19 y 26 1A SUB Z 122 TA Z 27 1B ESC 123 7B 28 1C FS 124 TC 29 1D GS 125 7D 30 1E RS 4 126 TE 31 1F US 127 TF D QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 87 Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP When using Ethernet to deploy QX Hawks in an application the host computer must be in the same IP range as the devices Network settings are accessible in Windows from the Control Panel The steps below show how TCP IP settings can be configured 1 From the Windows Start Menu open Control Panel and double click Network Connections amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites E X E pe Search Folders Tools Help Eu Address GC Control Panel Name Accessibility Options SE Add Hardware Add or Remove Programs 4M Administrative Tools ta Adobe Gamma 7 Automatic Updates Date and Time EN Display Folder Options ee Fonts F Game Controllers amp Internet Options amp akeyboard OP mail Mouse Nero BurnRights Network Connections I NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager Phone and Modem Options amp Power Options Printers and Faxes 9 Regional and Language Options Sy Scanners and Cameras EI Scheduled Tasks ty Security Cen
101. 101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two A 30 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Data Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 422 Status RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Ethernet Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 31 IP Address Serial Cmd Default Options Subnet Serial Cmd Default Options Gateway Serial Cmd Default Options Serial Commands lt K126 status P address subnet gatewa
102. 1024 q 1 100 jpg Valid Scales Depends on Full Dimensions 1280 x 1024 Full 320 x 256 Quarter divide by 4 160 x 128 Eighth divide by 8 5 Type bmp Bitmap image no loss of resolution jpg JPEG image loss of resolution with compression JPEG Compression Quality 1 100 _q1 jpg _9100 jpg Examples lt uy saved noread 2 320x256_gs bmp gt lt uy saved noread 2 320x256_q33 jpg gt 7 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Y Modem Download Code lt dy key gt Key app bin dsp bin ker bin Note The key field only accepts app bin dsp bin or ker bin 7 33 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Y Modem Transfer Options 1 34 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual RE pendices Contents Appendix A General Specifications ccccccccecccceecceceeeeeceueeeceaueesseeeesseseeesseeesseaeeessaeeesaneeessaeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications cccccceccccssscccceeceeseeeeeceeeeeceeeeesseeeesseeeessaeeeeseueeseeneeesees A 11 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations cccccecccecesececeecceeseececeeeceseeeeeeseeeessaneeeeees A 20 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PinOuts cccccseccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaegeeeeseaees A 22 Appendix E Serial COMMAMNAS c ccccccseecccceececeeeeeceeeeeeseeceeseeeeeceueceseueeeeseeeessaueeeseueeeseneeesens A 23 Appendix F Protocol COMMANGCS ccc
103. 15 3533 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rey API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 02 38 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 14 12 56 270 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 13 31 755 Error Request Failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection Failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 15 20 45 536 Connection closed with Instance 1 15 71 34 547 Onen Connection Failed Far Instance 1 Tnvalid Senment Tyne nr Senment valne in Path Ready ay ar 3 Right click on QX Hawk select Add Class1 Connection i EIPScan ElPscan gxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request I O Stack Device IO Module Help Dee m Target 1 ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 B Adapter 10 10 4 130 v Host 10 10 4 130 lt Request all fields are in hex Predefined None X QX HAWK Service hex le Class hex E Ea Add Device 10 Module Instance hex 301 Attribute hex 3 10 105 Remove Device wm Add Class1 Connection Mencii Add Class3 Connection Symbol Tag 2 inect ction Request Data Each byt
104. 2 01 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket to DB9 1 m 61 000153 01 QX Power Supply M12 12 pin Socket 1 3 m 97 000003 01 QX Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug to RJ45 1 m 61 000160 01 Ol NIOO P OJIN QX Photo Sensor M12 4 pin Plug NPN Dark On 2 m QX Cordset C Mount to Smart Series Light not shown 99 000020 02 61 000207 01 Note Additional cordsets and accessories are available in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Note The QX Hawk does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain INL I Host Serial 12 pin Socket to DB9 Common 12 pin Plug to 12 pin Socket UCC F eo 6 Lal S2_ One Power Supply 5 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor 6 8 Serial Standalone with QX 1 Common 12 pin Plug to 12 pin Socket Power Supply 12 pin Socket 6 Host Ethernet 8 pin Plug to RJ45 Photo Sensor Ethernet Standalone with QX 1 Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying pow
105. 20 LED would illuminate ISO IEC 16022 Grade Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Always Or Green Flash Duration 100 Beeper Good Read LED Configuration ISQUIEC 16022 Grade Final Grade wt Final Grade Symbol Contrast Print Growth Avital Hon Urnitormity Unused ECC Final Grade LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 final grade Symbol Contrast LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Contrast grade Print Growth LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Print Growth grade Axial Non Uniformity LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Axial Non Uniformity grade Unused ECC LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Unused ECC grade 5 106 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Qubpuk Contral Serial Command Echo Status This command is useful in removing any doubt about the imager s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K141 1 START gt is entered the imager will echo back lt K141 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message When enabled a configuration command received from the ho
106. 232 4 mbles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled OurpuUeE at ET CE NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENG ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF cR _so si DLEf Dcr De2 Dca Dca NAK SYN ETB can Em sue Esc Fs cs AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Qukoue ab Timeout Output at Timeout Determines the Timeout value for output External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RS2s2 A 4ribles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk at ETX CR Output at Timeout 0 200 Seconds QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 35 Communication Array Communication Modes Disabled Se Array Communication Modes aes Disabled Daisy Chain ID Status Mode Daisy Chain When set to Daisy Chain follows Microscan Daisy Chain protocol Note Daisy Chain can also be autoconfigured by sending the Daisy Chain Autoconfigure serial command Disabled Se Array Communication Modes SOUICE Disabled Daisy Chain ID Status Source Defines the communication port Array Communication Modes Disabled Source R5232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Boos A Daisy Chain ID 5232 B AS422 TCP Part 1 TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status When enabled the imager will append a two character prefix to each imager in the array This allows the user to identify which imager sent the data Note
107. 3 Bi directional Optoisolated 1 28V rated Ice lt 100 2X M4X0 7 V 24 6 mA at 24VDC current limited by user OR 2X M4X0 7 V 20 5 Note Nominal dimensions shown Typical tolerances apply QX Hawk C Mount Dimensions QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 3 General Specifications Safety Certifications CDRH FCC UL cUL Listed UL60950 CE CB BSMI compliant FE Os CE G RoHS WEEE Compliant ISO 9001 Registered Company TOV uss Member of TUV NORD Group 2011 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved Specifications subject to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available A 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual QX 1 Interface Device Mechanical Height 75 19 1 mm Width 2 50 83 5 mm Depth 3 15 80 mm Weight 7 oz 200 g QX 1 Dimensions QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices A 5 General Specifications Read Ranges Standard QX Hawk Note Ranges correspond to specific symbol element sizes and range increases as element size increases CMOS Modular Zoom Optics Inches mm
108. 5 Error Request failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection failed For Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 15 20 45 536 Connection closed with Instance 1 19 71 34 5A7 Onen Connection Failed Far Instance 1 Tnvalid Senment Tyne nr Seament Yalue in Path v 2 Set the IP Address to match QX Hawk hdd Mew Device IPAddress gt Host Mame Cancel A 114 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices QX Hawk will show up in the main window ew ElPScan ElPscan qxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfe File view Request I O Stack Device IO Module Help ee ee Target 1 ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 B Adapter 10 10 4 130 Request all fields are in hex Host 10 10 4 130 Predefined None X QAX HAWK Service hex le Class hex E 2 Instance hex 301 Attribute hex E 10105 53 i Member hex Symbol Tag Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Oa 26 f9 r Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a ucmm J oie 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 12 16
109. 7 D 1 0 if UEC 25 F 0 0 if UEC lt 25 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Targeting Activate Targeting System Sending a lt 11 gt command lower case L and numeral 1 from ESP s Terminal activates the imager s targeting system Important lt I1 gt is not supported by the QX Hawk C Mount Imager De activate Targeting System Sending a lt 10 gt command lower case L and numeral 0 de activates the imager s targeting system Important lt I0 gt is not supported by the QX Hawk C Mount Imager QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 31 Y Modem Transfer Options Y Modem Transfer Options Y Modem Upload lt uy path and image file name gt Note There are only three scales available from the imager The three scales are full quarter and eighth The Directory response will read out the image dimensions To receive the image request to download by the reported dimensions If quarter scaled or eighth scaled images are required then divide the dimensions by 4 or by 8 and request by the reduced dimensions 1 Directory None assumes root Root Directory saved Saved Directory 2 Image Status Good IP decoded a symbol No Read IP did not decode a symbol Mismatch IP decoded the wrong symbol Pending Not run through IP 3 Age Oton n Max Images 8 lt Max 4 Image Name Full Scale 1280 x 1024 bmp 1280 x 1024 gs bmp 1280 x 1024 jpg 1280 x
110. 8 10 53 03 4M 2 1 2009 10 53 03 4M 162 148 25 71 162 148 25 70 198 6 1 3 4 Aconnected QX Hawk s default address information can be verified in ESP by clicking the Search button in the Connection Wizard Compare the imager s IP address to the host s IP address to determine whether or not they are in the same subnet range this can be determined by your T department if you are unsure QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual IP Address RS 232 Ethemet TCP Port 1 Search 192 168 0 100 2001 00 0B 43 05 F4 D4 MODEL Qx 830 DESCRIPTION QX 830 for SQE APP 35 336301 10 EIPVID 1095 Qx 830 192 168 0 1 ore A 89 Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 5 To change the host computer s connection settings click Properties on the General tab To change TCP IP settings On the General tab click the Properties button to bring up a list of items being used by the current connection On the Local Area Connection Properties dialog double click Internet Protocol TCP IP Local Area Connection Status Support Connection Broadcom 440x 10 100 Integrated 1 day 07 29 28 100 0 Mbps This connection uses the following items A E Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks _ A JZ QoS Packet Scheduler M Intemet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area n
111. A user request of this setting would still return 632 e The column pointer is required to be an even value so regardless of the column pointer setting that is configured the actual column pointer will be decreased if required to an even value For example a column pointer value of 101 would actually be 100 A user request of this setting would still return 101 Top Defines the row position of the upper left starting point of the image window Window of Interest 0 480 Left Height 480 width TOZ Left Defines the column position of the upper left starting point of the image window B Window of Interest Top 0 0 752 Height 480 Width oe 4 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Height Defines the size in rows of the image window Maximum value is defined as the Maximum row size of Image sensor minus the row pointer value B window of Interest Top T Left 0 Dto 480 Ton Width foe Width Defines the size in columns of the image window Maximum value is defined as the Maximum column size of Image sensor minus the column pointer value Window of Interest Top T Left 0 Height 450 width roz Bto 752 Left koa QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 13 Camera Setup CCD SXGA Window of Interest Window of Interest Top T Left T Height 960 width 1280 The active pixel area of the image sensor is defined as the Window of Interest WOI This al
112. Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled 5 148 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 149 I O Parameters Output State sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Note Normally Closed is the default for the QX Hawk C Mount Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Normally Closed Pulse Width Sets the time in 1 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Output Stabe Mormally Oper Pulse width 0 500 a Seconds Output Mode Pulse Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Outp
113. Alt Ins Comm 32 000001 10 L5 Recent File name 322 000001 10 L5x Files of type RSLogix 5000 xML Files L5 hd QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Cancel Help Rung 0 of 1 JAPP WER A 105 Allen Bradley PLC Setup 11 At the Import Configuration window link the first two items to the module name assigned earlier Import Configuration Tags Data Types LL Name 8 Alias For Data Type Description Operation OeHawk AB ETHERNE Use Existing Os Hawk 0 1 ETHERME Use Existing OHawk_IO_big_pt Hawk_IO_E Create New Qs Hawk_I0_small_pt OHawk_ID_s Create New Cancel Help 12 Link I to the input assembly Import Configuration Tags Data Types AB ETHERME AB ETHERME gt Hayk 5 AB ETHERME Name Q Hawk I Data Type SB ETHERNET_MOCULE_DINT_176Bytes 1 0 Description Controller Program Show Show All A 106 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices 13 Link O to the output assembly Import Configuration Tage Data Types o Nams Alias For Data Type Description Operation ay Hank CO ABETHERNE SSC tng FARE OeHawk O AB ETHERNE Use Snore Oe a Bly a SE f H asHaw kT AB ETHERME H asHawk AB ETHERME HasHawk d AB ETHERME Name QeHawk O Data Type ABsETHERNET_MObULE_DINT_i2Bytes 0 0 Description Controller Program Show Show All
114. Code 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator Status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Bhornacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value background gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt A 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual BC412 Appendices lt K481 status check
115. Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from imagers to a host and commands from the host to the imagers or other devices Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of imager events DAC See Digital to Analog Converter Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary imagers allowing data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections Decode A Good Read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores ROM or flash settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by an imager Darkfield Illumination Lighting of objects surfaces or particles at very shallow or low angles so that light does not directly enter a reader s optical hardware Depth of Field The in focus range of an imaging system Measured from the distance behind an object to the distance in front of the object with all objects appearing in focus Diffused Lighting Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular glints from profiled highly reflective surfaces Digital to Analog Converter DAC A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor Digital Imaging Conversion of an image into pixels by means of an Analog
116. Cycle z Parameters Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Read Cycle tab to display the Read Cycle tree control Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Mulkisymbal Trigger Mode Continuous Read B Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 The indicates External Trigger State Serial Trigger Decodes Before Output End of Read Cycle Capture Mode Capture Time Store Mo Read Image Image Processing Settings Active Cloged that the setting is the default Actyve Clozed Continuous Se E To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Read Cycle settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Read Cycle section of Appendix E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 41 Read Cycle Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters involves a series of decisions based on the particular application as follows 1 Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle 2 Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either External Level or External Edge 3 Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New
117. DINT Unsigned 32 bit STRING32 STRING UDINT and BYTE A 32 bit length field followed by 8 bit ASCII characters QX Hawk Small IN Assembly 0x64 100 decimal IN QX Hawk gt PLC Field Data Type Size of Data Type Elements Field Name User Defined Tag Echo 32 bit flags E leee Echo from asm OUT OxC6 U32 Command Echo 32 bit flags Echo from asm OUT OxC6 2 U32 Output Control Echo Echo from asm OUT 0xC6 3 U32 Read Cycle Sequence Counter When this value changes it indicates the following read cycle report fields have changed 0 Read cycle report has been reset to empty Read cycle report data is only valid when Sequence is not 0 4 STRING 32 U32 U8 64 Read Cycle Report Decoded Data Up to 64 8 bit chars The first U32 is the length of the bar code data in the U8 64 field Total 84 U8 or 21 U32 This is a small lightweight input assembly It is a subset of the Big IN Assembly 0x65 It provides feedback of the output assembly and the text of any bar codes decoded by the reader see Big IN Assembly 0x65 for a description of the data fields A 92 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices QX Hawk Big IN Assembly 0x65 101 decimal IN QX Hawk gt PLC Field Data Type mune eee Field Name User Defined Tag Echo A l
118. DataBar Limited Disabled Disabled Enabled DataBar Omnidirectional Note DataBar Omnidirectional was previously known as RSS 14 Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identification may be needed DataBar 14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Note Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance instead of 2 stacked decode both stacked and non stacked DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DO jsabled Enabled 5 90 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters PDF417 Used in applications where a large amount of information over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity up to 2 700 numeric characters 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces ina 17 module s
119. Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data A 34 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0
120. Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 35 Serial Commands Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Preamble Preamble Status Serial Cmd lt K141 status oreamble character s gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Preamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K141 status preamble character s gt Default CR 0x0D Options 1 4 ASCII characters Postamble Postamble Status Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Postamble Char
121. E E JE ta DINT ene a p Configuration fi je 8 bit Address Host Name Paddess 2 Status Input E C Host Name Status Output Status Offline 6 Configure the Required Packet Interval RPI and click OK 20 ms or slower is strongly recommended 10 ms is the minimum allowed by QX Hawk f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit view Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help als ul S sael e z SaR xI E ECE No Forces a T OK EJ Meis ag J EE a sjo Redundancy ve D ALPIN Favorites Add On i J Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler amp Tasks 5 fa MainTask i MainProgram Unscheduled Programs amp Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions J Data Types Of User Defined Ep Strings Ga Add On Defined Ga Predefined Of Module Defined Trends amp j 1 0 Configuration H S 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fla 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 3 1756 ENBT A eip Ss Ethernet fJ 1756 ENBT A eip f ETHERNET MODULE gxhawk E Module Properties eip ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 20 04 ms 1 0 3200 0 ms I Inhibit Module I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Ready QX Hawk
122. EG Quality Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality E E 1 100 Object Info Gutput Disabled Grade Output Disabled Object Info Output If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality g Object Info Output Disabled z Grade Output nestled Enabled 5 110 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Grade Output Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Pork Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 30 Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled D l a b l E d x Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 111 I O Parameters EZ Button NONIPN4 NONI NS 84 EZ Button Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ Button status The EZ Button has four positions Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps and Four Beeps selectable by the length of time the button is he
123. EIPScan simulation tool published by Pyramid Solutions 1 Right click on ElPScan Test Tool select Add Device i EIPScan ElPscan qxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request I O Stack Device IO Module Help Dad s Target ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 rs Adapter 10 10 4 130 X Request all fields are in hex Host 10 1f Configure Assembly Predefined None v v Run mode Short I O Service hex le Class hex 4 Instance hex 301 Attribute hex Bo Member hex Symbol Tag 0 Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Ja 26 f9 Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 z 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rcv API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 12 16 15 33 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 02 38 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rey API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 14 12 56 270 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 13 31 75
124. EZMode Autoconnect Switch Modelgg Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities gt S bd fing 7 Send Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro l Macros listed Remove Macro or Edit Macro Click on desired on this bar Macro to run Next Row v Read Rate decode sec Y Read Rate percent Y End Read Rate Target Pattern On Y Target Pattern Off Cou For Help press F1 QX Hawk C Mount 1 QX Hawk C Mount BORNEO Point to Poini C The Terminal interface allows the user to send serial commands to the imager by using macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal also displays symbol data or information from the imager Right clicking on the Terminal screen displays a menu of additional options 6 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows the user to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal For example 1 Type ABC into the Find box P E Find 7 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 6 3 Send Send The Send function allows the user to enter serial commands and then send them to the imager 1 Type the command into the Send box or il Ogi Parameters Setup Send bd 2 Press Enter 3
125. Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 000 symbols ECC 050 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 050 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 050 symbols ECC 080 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 080 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 080 symbols 5 62 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters ECC 100 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 100 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 100 symbols ECC 140 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 140 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 140 symbols ECC 120 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 120 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 120 symbols ECC 130 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 130 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 130 symbols QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 63 Symbologies QR Code QR Code Disabled h Disabled Enabled Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode QR Code symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode QR Code symbols 5 64 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Micro QR Code Micro OR Code Disabled hal Disabled Enabled Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode Micro QR Code symbols Enabled Th
126. End of Read Cycle Output at ETX Output at Timeout QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 33 Communication Destination Port Determines the port to which data will be sent External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS232 AR Ambles to Source oI A Echo to Source AS2s2 B Output at End of Read Cycle Ragaz Output at ETX ii Beh l Mucoue at Timeout EtheretelP Ambles to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send Preambles and Postambles to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSi A Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Mucoue ak ETX MutpuUE at Timeout 00 Echo to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send an Echo to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port ASS Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Output ak ETH Enabled Qukoue ab Timeout 00 Output at End of Read Cycle Enables or Disables the ability to output data at the end of read cycle External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ 4 Armbles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled QUEBUE at ET Disabled Output at Timeout Enabled 5 34 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Output at ETX Determines the output at ETX External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port R5
127. Industrial Imager User s Manual A 103 Allen T A 104 Bradley PLC Setup Double click on the Controller Tags item and verify QX Hawk s I and O tags appear in the Controller Tags window Ml RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 L61 Ele Edit view Search Logic Communications ns Tools y Window Help Hed a sale E saal x ete BSS No Forces gt Ok No Edits Bao 4 Sere a Redundancy D J D 4 gt J Favor ites Add O Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler c g an R Handler Force Mask Style Tg a amet E athawk Oooo Pe m AB ETHERNET_MODULE C 0 G8 MainProgram E T z AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_176Bytes I 0 3 Unscheduled Programs Bi gxhawk 0 AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes 0 0 Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions J Data Types ER User Defined Strings Ep Add On Defined On Predefined p Module Defined Trends I O Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fla 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 3 1756 ENBT A eip ge Ethernet f 1756 ENBT A eip f ETHERNET MODULE gxhawk f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit view Search Logic Communications Tools _Window Help alsa S selel o slh iz RIRI Aal No Forces b He z j i No Edits a Evo 4 k Redundancy abh Favorites Add O C
128. MICROSCAN QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual P N 83 006800 Rev E Copyright and Disclaimer fi Copyright 2011 Microscan Systems Inc ISO 9001 Certified Issued by T V USA All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty and Terms of Sale For Standard Warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc Renton Headquarters 425 226 5700 800 251 7711 Nashua Office 603 598 8400 Microscan Europe 011 31 172 423360 Microscan Asia Pacific 65 6846 1214 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Introduction Table of Content
129. Multisymbol Separator field As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Separator NUL SOH ST ETX EOT ENG ACK BEL Bs f HT LF vT Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 95 Symbologies Symbology Identifier Symbology Identifier is a standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the imager analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data e closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier e A C E F G I L e or Q e A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 L PDF417 and MicroPDF417 e GS1 DataBar RSS Q Pharmacode e Modifier Example C indicates a Code 128 symbol Disabled Symbalogy Identifier izabled Enabled Disabled When set to Disabled symbol data output does not contain Symbology Identifier information Enabled When set to Enabled symbol data output contains a Symbology Identifier sequence Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 For Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status e For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Check
130. Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 141 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 2 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 2 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Gutpuk State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read A Number to Qutput On Ho Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the t
131. OM1 Press Start to auboconmerct e Once you have chosen the correct port click Start to connect e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible Point to Point COM 115 2K N 8 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 13 Menu Toolbar View The View menu allows the user to move quickly between the Parameters Setup Terminal and Utilities interfaces without using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows oes the user to access the Bar Code Dialog shown below Setup Terminal Utilities TIE Bar Code Dialog Symbols can be created in the Bar Code Dialog by typing the text to be encoded This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing the user to configure the imager by reading the user created symbols Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Configuration Save AS Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to BarCode Value lt lt gt lt encode new symbols Choose a spatial orientation k PAotation UO Degrees v Her the new symbol Caption l a Create a caption Same s Bar Code Value for the symbol that matches or Specify describes the j encoded data Add start configuration code Add end configuration code Save Settings Diff
132. On screen instructions assist the user with positioning testing and calibration Locate Calibrate Learn The calibration routine optimizes the imager by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings Click Locate to find the symbol in the field of view and display it in the video view Then click Calibrate to begin the calibration routine The Learn button allows you to save information about the next Data Matrix symbol decoded which allows faster and more consistent processing of subsequent identical symbols Test Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test for a quick indication of the imager s read capabilities and the limits of the application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to end the test F ESP Untitled Click Locate to find and display the symbol Click Calibrate to begin the File Model Options Connect Help calibration routine Calibration is also explained in Quick Start Click z e Learn to save information about the next Data Matrix symbol decoded 1 G 9 App Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Locate Calibrate Learn Welcome to Easy Setup Program ma eme 1 First position the imager at the desired Focal Distance Note To avoid glare set the angle of the reader about 15 degrees relative to the Click symbol here to
133. Options Connect View Help i 5 ae i a Sa o Heg Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Ic Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics li E Parameters ESP Values Report Pe error Sham Tree Errial Ef Symbol Quality El Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters The Symbol Quality Symbol Contrast Disabled interface IS divided Print Growth Disabled into three sections Axial Non uniForrmity Disabled Report Locate and Unused ECC Disabled Preferences El Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled See the reader s manual for information regarding these parameters The imager s field of view is shown here When grading is completed the initial report is also shown in this viewing area am EJES il For Help press F1 OX Hawk 1 OX Hawk ESRIREGTERIIINY Point to Point COMI 115 2K QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 163 Symbol Quality Locate Tab The Locate tab allows the user to determine the position of the symbol within the imager s field of view and to optimize the imager s camera settings for symbol quality evaluation EP ESP Untitled Sle Fie Model Options Connect View Help Sa xvoy b g Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Re
134. Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis No Read j Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality H Diagnostics Diagnostic Warning ln Read Cycle Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled 5 128 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 129 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state o
135. QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button These options can also be reached by right clicking in any of the configuration views rosy tp Send Recv Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Selecting this option will upload the imager s settings If the ESP file has a number of custom settings that must be maintained and downloaded into the imager these settings will be lost This function is useful for receiving uploading the imager s settings and saving them as a file for future use For example if the imager has settings that must not change Receive Reader Settings would load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the imager s settings will also assure that any unwanted subsequent changes in ESP will not be saved Saving Send No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current Receive Reader Settings memory a Save to Reader Send Mo Save Send and 5 Send and Save lt Z gt Default Current Menu Settings aiaia Activates all changes in current Default all ESF Settings memory and saves to the imager for power on Advanced Options Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves default settings for quick retrieval This option will be visible only if Enable Send and Save as Customer Defau
136. QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 49 Serial Commands Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 16 Options 0 to 128 Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 6 Options 0 to 128 Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edg
137. RROR gt will be output and the next lt V gt command without any new good reads or matches will return lt V 000000001 gt Good Read Match Counter Reset sending lt W gt sets the Good Read Match Counter to 000000000 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 1 Counters Mismatch Counter sending lt X gt displays the total number of symbols successfully decoded that do not match the master symbol since power on or the last Mismatch Counter Reset command A lt X OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt X gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example If the counter is at 999999999 and 1 additional count has been captured then lt X ERROR gt will be output and the next lt X gt command without any new mismatches will return lt X 000000001 gt Mismatch Counter Reset sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to 000000000 7 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Device Control Click the Utilities button and then the Device Control Utilities tab to display the Device Control view Fead Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Outputs Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Extras The Output 1 Pulse Output 2 7 Pulse and Output 3 Pulse buttons Disable Reader activate the link between th
138. Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection LAN or High Speed Internet Other Places C Lih gt Control Panel My Network Places G My Documents 4 My Computer 2 Local Area Connection 3 Local Area Conng Wireless Network Connection Create Shortcut Details Rename 4 View or change settings for this connection such as adapter protocol or modem configuration settings Local Area Connection A 88 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 3 The Local Area Connection Status dialog will appear To check the host computer s connection settings click Details on the Support tab To verify connection status _ Local Area Connection Status General Support Connection status ZAN Address Type IP Address Subnet Mask Assigned by DHCP 162 148 88 35 255 255 0 0 162 148 26 1 Default Gateway Windows did not detect problems with this connection If you cannot connect click Repair Appendices On the Support tab click the Details button to bring up a list of Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Property Physical Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DHCP Server Lease Obtained Lease Expires DNS Servers WINS Server Value 00 0C F1 EC 61 D5 162 148 88 35 255 255 0 0 162 148 26 1 162 148 25 71 1173 200
139. S Connect 210 Connectivity Box MS Connect 210 Connectivity Box with Display and Ethernet MS Connect 210 Connectivity Box with Ethernet Relay Module 120VAC 3 Amp Output Series 70 Type SM for MS Connect 210 98 000013 05 Relay Module 240VAC 3 Amp Output Series 70 Type SM for MS Connect 210 98 000013 06 Relay Module 24VDC 3 Amp Output Series 70 Type SM for MS Connect 210 Other Accessories 98 000143 01 Adapter Plate Kit 98 000144 01 Right Angle Mirror Kit 98 000146 01 Window Replacement Kit 98 000147 01 15 Lens Kit 98 000147 02 30 Lens Kit 98 000147 03 45 Lens Kit 98 000205 01 98 000206 01 98 500006 01 20 610024 01 98 000037 01 98 000054 01 98 000016 01 99 000056 01 99 000058 01 99 000060 01 99 000061 01 99 000050 01 99 000052 01 99 000049 01 99 000051 01 98 92800471 98 CO206 98 92800571 98 92800572 98 92800573 98 92800574 98 92800575 98 92800576 98 92800577 98 92800311 98 92800371 98 000218 01 Glass WIndow Kit with Infrared IR Filter Glass Window Kit Mounting Plate Kit Flat Custom Surfaces Trigger Connector 4 pin Plug screw terminal and field wireable for self wiring Extension Kit All Cameras 6 inch Kit Mounting Stand Base Plate Small Mounting Arm Adapter Kit 6 inch Accessory Bracket DOAL 50 to QX Hawk Accessory Bracket DOAL 75 to QX Hawk Accessory Bracket DOAL 100 to QX Hawk Accessory Bracket DOAL to C MOUNT QX Hawk Access
140. Trigger 5 42 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Multisymbol Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows one trigger to pick up all the symbols Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle The following conditions apply e The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols e All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled e If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance e If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Multisymbal Number af Symbols 1 Multisymbol Separator i Number of Symbols Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Multisymbal Number of Symbols i 1 100 Multisymbol Separator i Multisymbol Separator Multisymbol Separator is used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character The Multisymbol Separator can be any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Number of Symbols is set to any number greater
141. User s Manual Utilities Request New Master Status Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read Send the lt NEWM gt command from ESP s Terminal The imager returns lt NEWM next master to load gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 15 Delete Master Symbol Data Master symbol data can be deleted using ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number to be deleted 3 Delete text and click OK q Read Rate Counters Device Control Ditterences Master Databaze Firmware Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 B Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 Master Symbol 5 Master 5 Symbol Data Delete master symbol data in this field 7 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Firmware Click the Utilities button and then the Firmware tab to Utilities display the Firmware view Read Fate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Firmware Update Firmware Yerhicati
142. a Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TCP Port 2 2003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command EtherNetsIP Enabled Search and Configure Mode Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point 6 External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled Preamble Disabled H Postamble Enabled 3 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Application Examples The following examples demonstrate how the components described in previous pages can be deployed in industrial applications Daisy Chain Daisy chain configurations are used in applications such as product packaging where single items have multiple symbols For example a box with one symbol on the top and symbols on either side requires at least three imagers to ensure that all symbols will be decoded The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a daisy chain can be arranged One imager is placed above the conveyor line and one imager is placed on each side of the line The three imagers essentially function as a single imager and data is sent from the primary imager to the host or PLC Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional im
143. a TCP IP When enabled shows the TCP IP Connection Wizard by default Use Default Storage Location When enabled automatically stores data in ESP s Application Data folder 2 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information entered in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu an Memo Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document IE kK ins a Preferences n Document Memo N Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information entered in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created i Memo Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Preferences Document Memo Model Memo N Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file to make them available in the next session If the current session is not saved any memos that have been entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in the next session 2 11 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Menu Toolbar Connect The Connect dropdown menu allows the user to a
144. a camera modification will be used Notes Capture event always occurs when the 1st database entry is used This setting has no effect in Rapid Capture mode Rapid Capture mode always operates in Number of Frames mode with a Frame Count 1 Time The imager will load the next entry from the database to current after a defined time interval The timer will start upon use of a database entry In other words if the timer expires during a capture event the timer will not start again until the database entry has been incremented and the new entry has been loaded to current Number of Image Frames Database index is incremented after the specified number of image frames have been captured Frame Count Time Indicates the Number of Frames that will occur or the amount of Time that is required before the imager will load the next database configuration Timer resolution is 1ms Image Process Looping This feature is useful for processing a captured image frame multiple times with different Image Process Decode parameters Disabled An image is captured for every database configuration regardless if a camera setting has been modified Enabled When a database configuration is loaded to current and the Camera settings have not changed from last capture event a new image is not captured But rather the last image frame that was captured is re processed with the new Image Processing Decode configuration The o
145. abled izabled Enabled Symbol Length Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for the imager to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol Symbol Length 1 16 Minimum Bars Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Minimum Bars 5 L 1 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 83 Symbologies Bar Width Status If set to Mixed the imager will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the imager is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars Bar Width Status Fised Threshold Direction Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read Direction Forward Formard Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar Fixed Threshold Value 1 65535 Background Color Specifies whether the symbol will be presented on a black background or a white background Background Color White we 5 84 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters
146. acters Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default CR LF 0x0D 0x0A Options 1 4 ASCII characters Response Timeout Serial Cmd lt K143 response timeout gt Default 5 x10 ms 50 Options 0 to 255 x10 ms A 36 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices LRC Status Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ACK NAK Options Serial Cmd lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 00 disabled REQ Request 00 disabled STX Start of Text 00 disabled ETX End of Text 00 disabled ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Polling Mode Options Serial Cmd lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 04 REQ Request 05 STX Start of Text 02 ETX End of Text 03 ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 37 Serial Commands ASCII Character Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields such as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the imager as hex pairs see Appendix G ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Ex
147. actory Defaults and Save for Power On Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults and Save for Power On Programmable Output 1 Programmable Output 2 Device Control Programmable Output 3 Disable Imager Enable Imager Display All Part Numbers Display Application Code Part Number Display Boot Code Part Number Display DSP Code Part Number Firmware Checksum Display Kernel Code Part Number lt s gt Display SafeMode Part Number lt gt Display All Firmware Build Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Build Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Build Number lt d gt Display DSP Code Build Number lt k gt Display Kernel Code Build Number lt l gt Display All Available Firmware Checksums A 76 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Firmware Checksum lt la gt Display Application Code Code Checksum lt Id gt Display DSP Code Checksum lt rb key gt Roll Back Application Code lt gt Imager Status Request lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Request lt K gt All Range Request Imager Status l lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Request lt Knnnd gt Single Command Default lt LEARN gt Initiate Learn Operation Learn lt UNLEARN gt Initiate Unlearn Operation lt LEARN gt Display L
148. agers in the daisy chain A To Power Supply i QX 1 Host QX 1 or PLC mg D gt gt L gt ar rO ee oe Poa a gt F Supply lt HIG E Eg 10 Power QX 1 Multidrop Supply Concentrator Host or PLC QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 11 Application Examples Multidrop Multidrop networks are used in applications where it is necessary to decode symbols at multiple locations within an industrial process Imagers are placed at stations located between manufacturing steps and data from those imagers is directed to a multidrop concentrator before being sent to a host An example of this type of application is food packaging in which part number data is collected and tracked throughout the packaging process The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a multidrop network can be arranged gt cia He lt Power E te Supply QxX 1 Host i or PLC To Power Supply QX 1 TA gt CI gt L gt o JO ong a To Power Supply Multidrop Concentrator Host or PLC 3 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Ethernet TCP IP Hardware Installation Ethernet TCP IP is the standard Ethernet interface used to connect multiple locations in a network such as computers in an office network It can also be used to network other communications devices such as imagers and PLCs on a factory floor The highlighted areas below demonstr
149. al FIS 6800 1300G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD 45 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0000G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD C Mount Optic Serial FIS 6800 1000G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CCD C Mount Optic Ethernet Accessories Power Supplies 97 000003 01 Power Supply M12 12 pin Socket 1 3 m 97 000003 02 Power Supply M12 12 pin Plug 1 3m Communication Devices and Cables 98 000103 01 QxX 1 Interface Device 61 000148 01 Cordset Common M12 12 Pin Socket Ultralock to M12 12 Pin Plug Ultralock 3M 61 000148 02 61 000162 01 Cordset Common M12 12 Pin Socket Screw on to M12 12 Pin Plug Screw on 3M Cordset Common M12 12 Pin Socket Ultralock to M12 12 Pin Plug Ultralock 1M 61 000162 02 Cordset Common M12 12 Pin Socket Screw on to M12 12 Pin Plug Screw on 1M 61 000153 01 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 Pin Socket Ultralock to DB9 Socket 1M 61 000153 02 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket Screw on to DB9 Socket 1M 61 000164 01 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket Ultralock to DB9 Socket 3M 61 000164 02 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket Screw on to DBY Socket 3M 61 000152 01 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug Ultralock to DB9 Socket 1M 61 000152 02 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug Screw down to DB9 Socket 1M 61 000165 01 Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin
150. ality and 100 being the highest When possible use the highest quality when image transfer speed must be increased use a lower image quality setting Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations Line Scan C JPEG Images JPEG Image Quality Low High 70 1 100 NOTE Linescan is unavailable when using JPEG C Contrast pending_18200_2 64 ms 4 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Histogram The Histogram function is useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols A histogram is a graphic representation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity gray level in an image The horizontal axis represents the values of gray levels and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels for each gray level Note Since histograms are performed in the imager the results will be saved regardless of whether the image was uploaded as a JPEG jpg or a bitmap bmp 1 From the Evaluation window click the Histogram button The current image is transferred into the histogram operation This may take a moment since all the relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively 2 When the Histogram window opens you may need to expand the window and or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 3 To generate a histogram click and drag your cursor diagonally across the symbol or a portion of the symbol T
151. ample Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in the symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows lt K142h 3E gt Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field that is being changed is the postamble character s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut Protocol Selection Protocol Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode A 38 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Address Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Default 1 Options 1 50 1 Poll address 0x1C select address 0x1D 2 Poll address Ox1E select address 0x1F 50 Poll address 0x7E select address 0x7F Protocol Port Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Default 0 Options 0 1 0 Main RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 1 RS 422 485 on QX Hawk Connector B External Data Routing Mode Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Transparent
152. an be time consuming if the focus is not found on the 1st pass QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 123 I O Parameters Symbol Type E Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate wt Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Margin Calibrate Don t Calibrate Only the current symbologies enabled will be considered during the calibration process Calibrate Autodiscrimination is in effect during the calibration process All symbologies readable by the product except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be attempted during calibration Any new symbologies successfully decode during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will thereafter be enabled Window of Interest Framing If a WOI framing mode is enabled when calibration begins it will set the camera WOI to a full size image Once a symbol is decoded the camera WOI will be zoomed in both vertically and horizontally regardless which WOI mode is enabled to include the symbol plus an additional margin This is done to speed up the calibration process When calibration completes and is successful then the camera WOI will be adjusted according to the mode
153. and USPS4CB Status are enabled by default However if any of the three U S Postal symbologies is set to disabled individually symbols of that type will not be decoded by the imager even when U S Postal is enabled For example if U S Postal is enabled but POSTNET Status is disabled POSTNET symbols will not be decoded by the imager See POSTNET Status PLANET Status and USPS4CB Status for more detail about U S Postal symbologies Australia Post When Australia Post is enabled the imager will only decode Australia Post symbols Japan Post When Japan Post is enabled the imager will only decode Japan Post symbols Royal Mail When Royal Mail is enabled the imager will only decode Royal Mail symbols KIX When KIX is enabled the imager will only decode KIX symbols UPU When UPU is enabled the imager will decode UPU symbols and any U S Postal symbologies that might be enabled For example if Postal Symbology Type is set to UPU and POSTNET Status is enabled and the imager will attempt to decode both UPU and POSTNET symbols 5 86 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters POSTNET Status POSTNET is used by the United States Postal Service to direct mail The ZIP Code or ZIP 4 Code is encoded in the symbol Data is encoded in half height and full height bars making POSTNET a 2 state symbology The delivery point usually the last two digits of the address or post office box number is also typically encode
154. aph Read Rate Tic 1 Gukput Active ED tr put Active Disabled Output Active HPL t fan ct i Wee 5 120 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Calibration Options This command specifies the operation of the calibration feature The default configuration is setup to perform calibration on gain focus and symbol type Shutter speed is disabled as the default setting since shutter speed is more of an application specific parameter and normally should be configured by the user to meet the requirements of the application The calibration process will optimize the gain setting for the configured shutter speed Camera Note Background color Reverse Video is part of the calibration process regardless of the calibration setup After successful completion of calibration the background color will be set to the appropriate value depending on the calibrated symbol The mirrored image parameter is not part of the calibration process and must be configured appropriately by the user prior to calibration Mirrored Image B Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Margin ro Gain Disabled The gain is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Enabled The gain will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance Calibration Options ED ait
155. ata Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode R5232 B Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode E R5422 Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enabled 115 2K None One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Disabled 115 2K None One Parameters ESP Values Communications R5232 4 Baud Rate 115 2K parky Mone RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 are serial RS 232 A is always enabled RS 232 B and RS 422 can be enabled or disabled to match the physical requirements of the application Ethernet can also be enabled or disabled as required RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 can be configured for Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Decodes Before Output Symbol Position Output etc Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode Command or Data Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Disabled AR S Ethernet can be configured for IP Address iagnostics Outpu isable External Source Processing Mode Command S u b n et M ask Gateway l P Ad d ress M od e aie ec Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Informa ress 168 0 AR aaa tion Diagnostics Output and External Gateway 0 0 0 0 Source Processing Mode IP Address Mode Static TCP Port 1 2001 Symbol Dat
156. ate how an Ethernet daisy chain can be arranged Ethernet enabled imagers can also be set up in standalone configurations or multiple Ethernet enabled imagers along a production or packaging line can be connected to Ethernet lt To Power Supply QX QX 1 3 To Power k Supply QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 A C gt I gt an Multidrop E a Host or PLC 3 13 Application Examples 3 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Pes 4 Setup Contents NS o PNE EE PESE E AE et E E E N PEE neces E E EN E 4 2 AEA OU ae E E E A E E E a 4 18 SET E 9 Ree E N ETE E ce ae N ee ee AE AE E E A E E EES eee 4 21 Window of INTereSt sirsie nanie iskien iiaea RA uae bene kanai La i kadika kadris 4 22 Coniguraton EAL ANAS ssi ace nee e ier ara aa EAA E EN RER is 4 24 Ordered OUtpUt rriren eee ee ee ea ere eee a ree ene eae eee eer eee eee 4 33 UTE OE TP OUI ret ss on eee E Scenes ees ee taeeeseaes E onde sees aca 4 37 PED E EEE E e cc ps si secret sa cece E E IE eee dae A A A EAE E AE EE N 4 41 This section describes ESP s Setup interfaces Video Evaluation Calibration Window of Interest Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format and Dynamic Setup Each interface allows the user to make changes to imager configuration quickly and easily Z 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 1 Video Video The Video view allows the user to perform the same Locate Calibrate and
157. ath AB_ETHIP 1410 10 5 233 Backplane 0 z amp 4 Hlal alejo 4 gt h Favorites Add On Alarms Bit Timer Counter 5 Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler Tasks MainTask 5j amp MainProgram Program Tags MainRoutine Unscheduled Programs J Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions 5 6 Data Types Gi User Defined Strings i Add On Defined Of Predefined Module Defined Trends I O Configuration 5 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 f 3 1756 ENBT A eip H a Ethernet 1756 ENBT A eip f ETHERNET MODULE QxHawk Ladder Diagram Main Description Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller Scope fla MscanLogixS661 Show Show All Ej MainProgram MainRoutine 10 Navigate to the 32 000001 xx L5X file and click Import Import Rung My Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network Places Look in O Bin e me e H ssel Cut Rung Ctrl x Copy Rung Ctrl C e Paste Ctri Delete Rung Del Add Rung Ctrl R Edit Rung Enter Edit Rung Comment Ctrl D Import Rung Export Rung Start Pending Rung Edits Ctrl Shift S Accept Pending Rung Edits Cancel Pending Rung Edits Assemble Rung Edit Cancel Rung Edit Verify Rung Go To Ctrl G Add Ladder Element
158. ation Read Cycle the Terminal view Differences from Default H Store No Read Image H Image Processing Settings Click Capture and Decode to decode the symbol in the field of view and to see a high resolution image capture of the symbol 4 p QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Soe Read Rate t lt Counters Terminal Utilities Device Control Parameters ESP Values Master Database E Read Cycle Tabbed tree Firmware Multisymbol controls H Trigger Autoconnect to the H Serial Trigger imager Send and Decodes Before Output Receive command mi End of Read Cycle settin gs and e2 Capture Mode Switch Model H Capture Time Mirror Image reverses the image Contrast brightens the image Capture and Decode Attribute Value E Miror Image Contrast Symbol data is displayed here For Help press Fl QX Hawk 1 QX Hawk MEMAR Point to Point COM1 115 2 2 3 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is a loaded se Mew Chrl h Open Save Open Cra When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is Save Chrl 5 saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever Save os the same file is selected under Open Important When configuration changes are saved to the hard PEMEak Ctrl F driv
159. atted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled ka Disabled Enabled Output on Print Growth The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Print Growth Disabled w izabled Enabled Output on Axial Non Uniformity The axial non uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled al izabled Enabled Output On Unused ECC The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value tI cu EE T a 4 Gutpuet on Unused ECC izabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 145 I O Parameters Symbol Contrast Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade L w Print Growth Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Print Growth grade is under the threshold Print Growth Threshold Grade C w Axial Non Uniformity Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Axial Non Uniformity grade is under the threshold A
160. atus separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 51 Serial Commands Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 Status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format applicat
161. big_pt OUT eek OXHawk_OUT_udt K QXHawk_IO_big_udt z i e o QXHawk_IO_small_udt EET G gt XHawk_10_big_pLOUT usertag Decimal _ BINT QxHawk_OUT_udt QXHawk_IO_big_ptOUT command t t GXHawk_command Strings _ QXHawk_ O_big_pt OUT command trigger Q Decimal BOOL a str128 0XHawk_I0_big_pt OUT command new_ master 0 Decimal BOOL dge requ xt decode to A aiani QXHawk_10_big_pt OUT command res2 O Decimal BOOL E ca QXHawk_I0_big_ptOUT command res3 O Decimal BOOL i _ QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res4 0 Decimal BOOL L_ 0XxHawk_I0_big_pt DUT command res5 0 Decimal BOOL reser 7 QxHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res6 0 Decimal BOOL F 0xHawk_I0_big_pt DUT command res7 0 Decimal BOOL reserved L_ QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command disable_scan Q Decimal BOOL Rising edge it ing X gt Monitor Tags A EdIt Tags 7 ao ic Enter a tag value a F QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 111 Allen Bradley PLC Setup 21 Change the OUT usertag to non zero f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 Program Tags MainProgram E File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help X alela S ale ael E alaa i wim BEP EE D No Forces b M Controller OK F Afia e A t F Battery OK No Edits 4 4 h Favorites Add On Alarms Timer Counter I U lL ook Scope E8 MainProgram Show Show All
162. ble Sample Symbol Origina ABCDEFGHIJKLMN OFQARS TUY e201 23456709 Add Insert Step Add Extract Step Output CDE A Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCOEFGHWELMNOPORS TUY w 201 23456785 Output COE 4 40 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup is used to calculate image capture timing during a read cycle Without proper timing the imager will not be able to decode all symbols in a read cycle An external trigger is used to activate image captures so the user can make timing adjustments as capture events Occur TOO Read Rate is represented graphically in lt q _ real time as the user makes adjustments to the time delay between image captures The user can control Capture Number of Captures and Number of Symbols using these spin boxes Us Humber of Number of Capture Captures Symbols Read Rate nos Delay Sec Delay Adjustment 1 078432 O Coarse Medium Decrease Fine Increase lt gt The Delay Adjustment slider allows the user extremely precise control of the time delays between image captures in a read cycle Delay values are shown in seconds in the field above the slider The Coarse and Fine Delay Adjustment options determine whether larger or smaller adjustment increments will be used QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 41 Dynamic Se
163. bled Protocol Port RS 232 A or RS 422 can be used as Protocol Ports Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Prokocol Port AS2de 4 ACK MAK Options RES REQ NUL STs MUL ETs ML ALK ALE MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES ET REQ ENG STs STs ETs ETs ALK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout 5 LAZ Status Disabled 5 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters ACK NAK Options These parameters take effect for ACK NAK on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options The imager always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 4 ACK PAK Options RES ALL REQ ALL ST ALL ETS MUL ACE ALK MAF MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STX ETX ETX ACE ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout J LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset NUL 0x00 REQ Request NUL 0x00 STX Start of Text NUL 0x00 ETX End of Text NUL 0x00 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 25 Communication ACK NAK Protocol The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it do
164. bled for Morphological Operation to function Disable Morphological Preprocessing Operation Disabled Operator Size Enabled Morphological Operation and Operator Size Operation Morphological Operation allows the user to select the method for processing captured images Operation Erode we Operator Size Erode Erode increases the dark cell size of a symbol Useful for increasing the dark cell size of a dark on light Data Matrix symbol Dilate Dilate increases the light cell size of a symbol Useful for increasing the light cell size of a light on dark Data Matrix symbol 4 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Open Open removes minor light defects of dark cells by performing a Dilate function followed by an Erode function hi ey x x Close Close removed minor dark defects of light cells by performing an Erode function followed by a Dilate function gons o 2e0 1 se es an ee 4 KA Operator Size Operator Size determines the size of the area or pixel neighborhood measured in pixels in which the morphological operation is being performed Operator Size Small Small Large Small 3 pixels by 3 pixels Medium 5 pixels by 5 pixels Large 7 pixels by 7 pixels QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 17 Evaluation Evaluation In Evaluation you can view images curren
165. bol data gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt Global Symbol Quality Output lt K708 quality output separator output mode gt ISO IEC 16022 Parameters lt K709 symbo contrast print growth axial non uniformity unused ECC gt Data Matrix Grading lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Frame Information ISO IEC 16022 Grade LED Display lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt lt K737 unused LED AIM LED display gt Green Flash LED lt K750 LED status targeting status green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 comm bar graph O 1 1 O 2 gt EZ Trax Output lt K75 7 status port image mode image format image quality object info enable grade enable gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 first beep second beep third beep fourth beep gt gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 25 Serial Commands Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 2
166. cate by ESP e In ESP s EZ Mode click the Locate button to enable the red X pattern Calibrate E Learn Fast Test Stop C Decodes per Second Contrast The symbol in the field of view will appear in the video view beneath the Locate and Calibrate buttons and you will see the red target pattern projected from the front of the imager Note The QX Hawk C Mount does not display a target pattern e Center the target pattern on the symbol Center on object in field of view Important The entire symbol should fall within the field of view FOV of the imager The field of view is what appears in ESP s Locate Calibrate window in EZ Mode e Click the Stop button to end the Locate function 1 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Locate by EZ Button If you are not connected to a host computer the EZ Button allows you to locate a symbol in the imager s field of view D NONIN NONICNS EZ Button e Hold down the EZ Button for about one second and release when you hear one short beep The amber 20 LED will illuminate and you will see the red target pattern projected from the front of the imager e Center the target pattern on the symbol Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 13 Calibrate Step 8
167. cations DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled izabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 4 a 1 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 89 Symbologies DataBar Limited Note DataBar Limited was previously known as RSS Limited DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser scanners and CCD imagers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot imagers Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional
168. ccccccecccceeeeceeeeeeesaeeeesaneees A 11 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations cccccceeeeeeeeeees A 20 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PInOuts cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes A 22 Appendix E Serial COMMAMNAS ccccseccccseececeeececaeeeessaeeeesauseeseaaees A 23 Appendix F Protocol COMMANGS ccccccseeececeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeees A 78 Appendix G ASCIl Table sc cnsccset eet ee Ue A 87 Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cceccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeens A 88 Appendix Using EtherNet IP ccccccccccccsseceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaneees A 91 Appendix J Allen Bradley PLC Setup cccccccceecccsssseeeeeseeeseeeeeees A 100 Appendix K Interface Standards ccccccccccseeceecseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeens A 121 Appendix L Glossary Of Terms cccccceeccceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeessaes A 122 iv QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Introduction About the QX Hawk Industrial Imager The key features of the QX Hawk Industrial Imager are Standard and C Mount versions available Fully integrated liquid lens technology allowing infinite focus flexibility High resolution modular optical zoom system Simple plug and play connectivity with Ultra Lock cordsets and connectors Best in class X Mode algorithms Embedded Ethernet TCP IP A green flash visible from all angles to signal a successful read LED array for performa
169. cccecccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 Power and Trigger SWItChing cccccceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseeeeeeeas 3 9 Fe py UIE ING ste unconnected A Ua aerial tes Adad ty aula R A 3 10 Application Examples ccccccccceececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeaaees 3 11 Chapter 4 Setup Vid ease en sete ease eee ce a Eee 4 2 VAI AT OM eiaioos seecesdecnece eA ee Gide ead ee ee ea 4 18 calibration sosanna Gosselin iets eee ete a as 4 21 Window OF IMereSt axes ecient css diced elec cee 4 22 Configuration Database ia ascccescscsceve dace sensederieseiviens sane ecieeneeaeaeak 4 24 Ordered Oululaisen nee ioe te eek ee 4 33 OUNDUL FORM a 25 2 cheno ct N Oe 4 37 DY MaIMIG SOUP a6 Sevier ate Oe eee ach ne eae es 4 41 Chapter 5 Parameters lolanigai 8 gl ters 11 2 deeeeneee eee eee en eer Cera ene en meet nr sean ee eee ae eee 5 2 FS CC Cahn rat i a ieee cea st Nl aa eae na cette Gants 5 41 SVIMDOIOGICS suerte tee casice area E e iGeinaeee 5 61 YO Parameters cccccccececccceececeeeeeceeececseeceseueeeseeaeesseaeeessaeeesseeesseeeeess 5 97 Symbol Quality 20 0 ccccceeeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeceeeseseeessueeeeeeas 5 159 Mat CN COG lt MA 5 166 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual iii Table of Contents DANOS ICS o ae titers ae erk de nate uencsea eee asec sanenwauacnaecuaboodesesulactees 5 175 Chapter 6 Terminal PETAL WV TING OW aee ra a a a 6 2 PP MNCL PAE EAE IIT E AEE E eos eat A NAE T
170. cceccceeseceeeeececeeeeeeseeceeseeeeeseeeceseuceeeseecesseeeesseeeeeseeeeesaes A 78 Appendix G ASCII Table ccccccccccccsscccceseeeceeeeseuseeccasseecaeeeseusessaeeeesageessaseeesaaeeseuseessansensags A 87 Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cccccccseeecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeessaaes A 88 Appendix Using EtherNet IP 0 ccccccccccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeseueeeeseeeesseeeeeseeeesseeeesaeesaaees A 91 Appendix J Allen Bradley PLC Setup cecccccccccceseeeceeeceeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeeeseeeeseaeeeteeeeesseeeeeas A 100 Appendix K Interface Standards cccccccccccccsecceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesseeeeesaeeeesseeeeseaeeesseeesaneeeees A 121 Appendix L Glossary Of Terms cccccccccsecceceeeeceaeeeseeeeesaeeeeseaeseeseeeeessaeeesseeeessaeeessaeeeeseeeess A 122 A 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Standard QX Hawk Height 1 59 40 5 mm Width 2 27 57 6 mm Depth 3 79 96 3 mm Weight 10 oz 280 g Mechanical QX Hawk C Mount Height 4 03 102 3 mm Width 2 27 57 6 mm Depth 1 59 40 5 mm Weight 11 oz 320 g Environmental Enclosure Die cast aluminum IP65 67 rated Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage Temperature 29 to 70 C 20 to 158 F Humidity up to 90 non condensing Communication Interface Standar
171. ccess the Connection Wizard as well as the Autoconnect and Configure Multidrop dialogs Connect and Disconnect can also be performed directly from the dropdown menu without opening a dialog Connect Connection Wizard Auroconnecek Connect Disconnect Configure Multidrop Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure RS 232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application and click Connect IP Address 162 148 88 51 an n N R 4 TCP Port 2001 3 Click the Search button to locate imagers on the network RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible 2 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Autoconnect e If the RS 232 connection attempt fails use Autoconnect to establish a connection between the imager and the host Sr Autoconnect Connecting Select the COM Port COM1 Press Start to auboconmect Stop Select the COM Fort COM Other e If the communication port is not the default COM1 use the dropdown menu to change the port Select the COM Port C
172. ch port behaves as the Aux Port e Only one daisy chain setup required per system e Minimal configuration required for each port with similar items grouped together 5 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters RS 232 A The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting RS2s2 4 Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Hone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 5 Communication Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded sy
173. cifies the frame delays associated with the frames captured in a rapid capture mode of operation Time Before 1st Capture This value specifies the delay from the trigger to the first capture of any triggered read cycle Capture Time Time Before 1st Capture 0 0000 Seconds Time Between Captures 1 2 Time Between Captures 2 3 Time Between Captures 3 4 Time Between Captures 4 5 Time Between Captures 5 6 Time Between Captures 6 Time Between Captures 7 0 oO Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo amp Time Between Captures 1 2 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 2 3 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 3 4 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 4 5 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 5 6 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 57 Read Cycle Time Between Captures 6 7 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture seque
174. ction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST _TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 83 Protocol Commands Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST _TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 84 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ
175. cy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 1 amp Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Bch Locate Bictarsames Show Tree Control ee Symbol Quality E Global Total Read Time Disabled Calibrate Symbol Quality Separator yn i Click the Locate Click the Calibrate B Data Matrix B ISQVIEC 16022 Parameters seni r play the button to optimize Se ee camera settings Symbol Contrast f s field of vi Frint Growth Imager s field OT VIEW Axial Non uniformity S Unused ECC Disabled El Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled wt B For Help press F1 OXHawk 1 OX Hawk EGRREGTERIINY Point to Point COM1 115 2K M 8 5 164 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when grading is completed For this reason the user is advised to set preferences before performing grading Report Locate Preferences i Show Tree Control Fields for report This information is appended at the Uperator Name 1 Doe bottom of the report
176. d disabled 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x15 disabled lt K141 0 gt ACK lt K141 gt ACK lt K141 0 gt ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX symbol data NAK host rejects symbol data resend data ACK transaction complete lt K141 gt ACK lt K141 0 gt timeout reached timeout reached timeout reached Timeout Reached transaction aborted data is flushed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices A 79 Protocol Commands Setup 2 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX HOST_TX 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x15 enabled disabled disabled disabled disabled lt K141 0 gt a ACK lt K141 gt B ACK lt K141 0 gt a ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX A 80 lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC NAK lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC ACK QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H imager_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt k imager_TX ACK imager_TX lt K141 4M gt w HOST_TX ACK QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 81 Setup 4
177. d Interfaces RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet CE Mark General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 ITE Immunity Standard Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment EN 55022 98 ITE Disturbances Light Source Standard QX Hawk Type High output LEDs WARNING DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT Light Output 564 mW Wavelength 470 525 617 nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Symbologies 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 0 200 QR Code Micro QR Code Aztec Code Stacked Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 GS1 DataBar Composite and Stacked Linear Symbologies Code 39 Code 128 BC412 Interleaved 2 of 5 UCP EAN Codabar Code 93 Pharmacode Postal Symbologies Read Parameters Pitch 30 Skew 30 Tilt 360 CMOS Decode Rate Up to 60 decodes per second CCD Decode Rate Up to 20 decodes per second a 10in fo 78 7mm OX HAW a ellie e Uuu H im i aP 3 7 FIN 96 3mm 1 59in 405m 20in i 20 amm 1 13m ER 28 8rnrn CENTER OF OPTICS 63in l lmm 12 4mm am Note Nominal dimensions shown Typical tolerances apply QX Hawk Dimensions Focal Range Standard QX Hawk 1 33 mm to liquid lens autofocus Indicators LEDs Read performance power read status network activity I O Green Flash Standard QX Hawk Good Read Red X Standard QX Hawk Sy
178. d OUT _small_pt or _big_pt Program Tags MainRoutine Unscheduled Programs Motion Groups a baat T E Add On Instructions Dest XHawk_O_small_pt IN amp Data Types Length 1 a far User Defined Ei QxHawk_command fe QxXHawk_device_status PS R QxHawk_external_inputs Synchronous Copy File E QxHawk_external_outputs aXHawk_lO_small_pt OUT S QxHawk_IN_big_udt QXHawk O K QXHawk_IN_small_udt 1 A QxHawk_IO_big_udt E QXHawk_IO_small_udt K QXHawk_OUT_udt E A Strings E str128 KA str 4 i STRING oo ne R MainRoutine MainPrograrr ha ai 4 gt J Monitor Tags Edit Tags eer Rung 1 of 2 APP PER Enter non BOOL file source operand In this example the big assembly set has been kept RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsial a sale oA i AIT Wig aa Offline 0 m RUN E Ed Path AB ETHIP 1910 10 5 233 Backplane O z l No Forces b OK j No Edits 4 Hlal atl ofw o gt Redundancy 9 D 4 b h Favorites Add On Alarms Bit Timer Counter l Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 5 Tasks 5 fa MainTask 23 MainProgram l EE Ej MainProgram MainRoutine fi choose one CPS for IN and OUT _small_pt or _big_pt Program Tags MainRoutine Unscheduled Programs Motion Gro
179. d in POSTNET symbols If U S Postal and POSTNET Status are both enabled the imager will decode POSTNET symbols POSTNET Status Enabled wt Disabled Enabled PLANET Status PLANET Postal Alphanumeric Encoding Technique is a symbology used by the United States Postal Service to track and identify items during delivery Each PLANET symbol is either 12 or 14 digits long and encodes data in half height and full height bars making PLANET a 2 state symbology The symbol always starts and ends with a full height bar or guard rail and each individual digit is represented by a set of five bars in which two of the bars are always short lf U S Postal and PLANET Status are both enabled the imager will decode PLANET symbols PLANET Status Enabled wt Disabled Enabled USPS4CB Status USPS4CEB also called Intelligent Mail is used by the United States Postal Service to sort and track individual items as well as flats of mail USPS4CB combines the capabilities of POSTNET and PLANET and can encode 31 digits 65 bars USPS4CB symbols are slightly longer than POSTNET symbols and offer additional flexibility in choosing symbol height and width Data is encoded in four types of bars states each of which is identified by a name and a value This type of postal symbol is known as 4 state Each bar has a tracker or middle section to which an ascender top section or descend
180. d lot code info but only the part number information is needed set the imager to sort only the part number and to ignore the other characters Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 3000 Match Length 1 Wild Card t Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Match Length Example f Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match
181. decodes Stand Focal distance Focal distance QX Hawk C Mount Imager and Symbol Orientation Important Avoid excessive skew or pitch Maximum skew is 30 maximum pitch is 30 1 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP ESP Software can be found on the Microscan Tools Drive or Tools CD that is packaged with the QX Hawk and QX Hawk C Mount 1 Follow the prompts to install ESP from the Tools Drive or Tools CD 2 Click on the ESP icon to run the program Note ESP can also be installed from the Download Center at www microscan com Minimum System Requirements e 233 MHz Pentium processor e Windows 7 32 bit or 64 bit Vista 32 bit or 64 bit XP or 2000 operating system e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e 128 MB RAM or greater e 80 MB hard drive space e 800 x 600 minimum 256 color display 1024 x 768 32 bit color recommended QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 7 Select Model Step 5 Select Model Standard QX Hawk When you start ESP the model menu will appear Select a Model Current Legacy eee ec MS 2 MS 3 MS 3 M EZ Match eeheu 0x 870 M5 890 MS Connect MS Connect 210 S Seee Quadrus MINI Quads Quadrus MINI MINI Hawk o GXHawk OXHawk MINI 3 Velocity C Mount E 2 e e HS 2D MsS 0 Mobile Hawk Quadrus Verifier HE4xT
182. default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the imager by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset 1 Apply power to the imager 2 Locate default pin and ground 3 Momentarily connect the default and ground wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps 4 Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On Use the EZ Button to default the imager by holding it down while applying power to the imager if this feature is enabled 7 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Imager Status lt gt Imager Status Request The imager responds to a status request lt gt with a two character hex value such as lt 22 gt To determine status 1 Look up the binary conversion in the table below For example the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary as read from binary digits 3 through 0 the second hex 2 is also 0 0 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4 2 Next enter your binary values from the table below in the Binary column next to the appropriate bit Bit Binary Imager Status 0 o Commanderor detected 2 0 Communication error detected Binary Bit Digits Value 7 6 5 4 3 2 17 3 0 Flash sector unprot
183. dustrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Clear Read Cycle Report and Counters 16 Trigger Decode Match Mismatch Noread Decoded Data string and Sequence A transition from O0 to 1 is similar to sending the commands lt U gt lt W gt lt Y gt lt O gt which clear the historical read cycle counters Also the Sequence counter and Decoded Data string will go to 0 Note that if this command is received while a read cycle is active execution of the command will be delayed until the read cycle has ended and the read cycle s information will probably be lost Unlatch Outputs 17 lf any outputs are configured for Unlatch on Input1 a transition from O to 1 will unlatch the output See configuration commands K810 812 It is not necessary for Input 1 to be enabled External Output Control Bit Pin Name 0 Out1 1 Out2 2 Out3 3 31 Reserved 0 open the output contact 1 close the output contact Note Not operational at this time QX Hawk OUT Assembly 0xC7 199 decimal Serial Command OUT PLC gt QX Hawk Size of Data Field Data Type Type Elements Field Name QO U32 1 Length of Command String Field 1 1 U8 256 Command String Accessible only by unconnected explicit message This assembly enables the PLC to send serial commands to the device similar to a serial port Known Issues and Limitations 1 External Output Control has not been implemented
184. e A 101 Allen Bradley PLC Setup 4 Configure the following fields Name A useful name to remember the unit IP Address The IP Address of QX Hawk Comm Format Data DINT Input Assembly Instance Choose either 100 Small or 101 Big Input Size 21 Small or 44 Big Output Assembly Instance 198 Output Size 3 Configuration Assembly Instance 1 Configuration Size 0 none 5 Click OK when done Example For Small IN Instance 100 Size 21 W Module Properties eip ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent eip Mame OoHawk Connection flat 7 ssembly Descriptions Instance SIZE Input ho at H zbi Output i dg 3 32 bit Comm Format Data DINT 7 l obit Address Host Name IF Address C Host Name Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Configuration A 102 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Example For Big IN Instance 101 Size 44 E Module Properties eip ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Type ETHERNET MODULE Generne Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent eip Mame OH awk Connection Parameters Assembly Description Instance Size Input fi 0i a4 32 bit Output fiss fa 32 bit
185. e 2 Input Active Database Identifier Output Serial Cmd Default Options Separator Serial Cmd Default Options A 62 lt K759 status separator gt 0 Disabed 0 Disabled 1 Enabled lt K759 status separator gt Space 0x20 Any 7 bit ASCII character QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices EZ Button Global Status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Default on Power On Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EZ Button Modes Standard QX Hawk Serial Cmd lt K771 first beep second beep third beep fourth beep gt Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar C
186. e and of the host connector The buttons in the Extras section Disable or Enable Enable Reader the reader Device Control Serial Utility Commands Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader Sending lt I gt will turn the imager OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the imager to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded or the imager is being configured Disabling the imager will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Reader sending lt H gt will turn the imager ON and allow it to enter read cycles QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 9 Differences from Default Differences from Default Utilities Click the Utilities button and then the Differences tab to display the Differences from Default view Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration
187. e Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled The imager will accept any length BC412 symbol as valid Enabled The imager will reject any BC412 symbol that does not match the fixed code length value for BC412 BC412 Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled wt Fixed Symbol Length Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length The code length used to validate BC 412 symbols if the fixed code length status is set to enabled BC4i2 Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Skatus Disabled hl Fixed Symbol Length o g 1 64 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 71 Symbologies Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as symbol truncation A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers O through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check character is highly recommended Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Out
188. e Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge A 50 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices EAN Status Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Supplementals Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Character UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Supplemental Type UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator st
189. e between 6 7 time between 7 8 gt Store No Read Image lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Image Processing Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout gt Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes sort database gt Configuration Database Standard QX Hawk lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width symbol type morphology operation morphology size gt Configuration Database QX Hawk C Mount lt K255 index shutter speed gain unused sub sampling row pointer column pointer unused column width unused unused unused gt Load Current Setting from Configuration Database lt K255 index gt Request Database Index Setting lt K255 index gt Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Symbologies Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Aztec lt K458 status gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt Postal Symbologies lt K460 postal type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status
190. e these changes are not automatically saved to the imager Irn l port The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and ence received between ESP and the imager and ESP and the host spore hard drive Recent File Exit Save to Imager Receive Imager Settings Import Export Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Model The Model dropdown menu shows a list of recent imagers that have been used with ESP When a different model is chosen the connection to the present model is terminated OX Hawk i Mew Model Remove Model To connect to another model select New Model choose a new model from the pop up menu that appears and click OK Note When an ESP file is saved the settings of all the models defined in that file are saved QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows the user to save memos and set up ESP Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP whenever Preferences ESP is opened next whether or not the ESP file is saved Options Document Mema Model Memo Preferences gt General Tab Preferences l Gened Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced On Startup Toolbar Style The Toolbar Style options allow the u
191. e Image The imager will process codewords from multiple images within the same read cycle and combine them to decode a single PDF417 symbol 5 92 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters MicroPDF417 Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Micro POF 417 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the imager will reject any MicroPDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 1 366 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 93 Symbologies Aztec Code Used in document imaging railway ticket validation and some postal applications A 2D matrix symbology built on a square grid with a square bull s eye pattern at the center Azt
192. e Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Symbologies tab to display the Symbologies tree control Farameters Symbologies 20 Symbologies Data Matrix ECC O00 status ECC O50 status ECC 080 status ECE 100 status ECE 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status OR Code Micro OR Code Aztec Code W 10 Symbologies H Stacked Symbologies Composite Symbology Identifier To open nested options 22 elise single click the Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled The indicates that the setting is the default To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Symbologies settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Symbologies section of Appendix E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 61 Symbologies Data Matrix Data Matrix ECC 200 Status Enabled ECC O00 Status Disabled ECC 050 Status Disabled ECC 080 Status Disabled ECC 100 Status Disabled ECC 140 Status Disabled ECC 120 Status Disabled ECC 130 Status Disabled ECC 200 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 200 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 200 symbols ECC 000 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 000 symbols
193. e clock pattern of the binary digitized image then comparing it to a nominal value and minimum and maximum values The grade is defined in this way A 4 0 if 050 lt PG lt 0 50 B 3 0 if 070 lt PG lt 0 70 C 2 0 if 085 lt PG lt 0 85 D 1 0 if 100 lt PG lt 1 00 F 0 0 if PG lt 1 00 or PG gt 1 00 Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only Definition Axial non uniformity is a measure of how much the sampling point Spacing differs from one axis to another namely AN abs XAVG YAVG XAVG YAVG 2 where abs yields the absolute value If a symbology has more than two major axes then AN is computed for those two average spacings which differ the most The grade is defined in this way ae 0 if AN lt 06 B 2 0 if AN lt 08 C 2 0 if AN lt 10 D 1 0 if AN lt 12 F 0 0 if AN 2 12 Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only Definition 7 30 The correction capacity of Reed Solomon decoding is expressed in the equation e 2d lt d p where e is the number of erasures t is the number of errors d is the number of error correction codewords and p is the number of codewords reserved for error detection The Unused Error Correction parameter tests the extent to which regional or spot damage in the symbol has eroded the decoding safety margin that error correction provides The grade is defined in this way A 4 0 if UEC 62 B 3 0 if UEC 50 C 2 0 if UEC 2 3
194. e for this database index lt K255 gt Add 65536 Aztec If enabled Aztec will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 131072 Current Postal Symbology If enabled Current Postal Symbology will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 262144 4 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Morphology Operation Allows the user to select the method for processing captured images Parameter values for serial command lt K255 gt 0 Disable 1 Erode 2 Dilate 3 Open 4 Close Morphology Size Determines the size of the area or pixel neighborhood measured in pixels in which the morphological operation is being performed Parameter values for serial command lt K255 gt 3 Small 3 pixels by 3 pixels 5 Medium 5 pixels by 5 pixels 7 Large 7 pixels by 7 pixels QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 29 Configuration Database Database and Capture Modes The configuration database behaves the same for both Rapid and Continuous Capture Mode the only discernable difference is in Rapid capture mode the database incrementing always operates in Number of Image Frames with a frame count of 1 Camera Settings When the database loads a camera configuration and there is a change in shutter speed integration time window of interest WOI or sub sampling from the last image that was captured Then one image frame need
195. e imager will attempt to decode Micro QR Code symbols QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 65 Symbologies Code 39 Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Code 39 Enabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Qutpuk Status Disabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Full ASCII Set Disabled Check Character Status Enables or Disables the check character Check Character Status Disabled izabled Enabled Check Character Output Status Check Character Output Status when added to the symbol provides additional data security When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled Note With Check Character Output Status enabled and an External Edge External Level or Serial Data trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read Message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Large Intercharacter Gap Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification When enabled the imager can read symbols with
196. e is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Da 26 f9 Start Classi Auto Test i g p Classi Auto T a queue Incoming Class1 Au r Response Response Size decimal 260 Start Class1 Output Test tput st 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000000 a 00 00 00 00 00 000000000001 000000 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 z UCMM Ei gt 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 Ls 12 16 15 33 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 13 31 755 Error Request failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 1687 Open Connection failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 15 20 45 536 Connection closed with Instance 1 15 21 34 567 Open Connection Failed For Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 15 22 20 854 Connection closed with Instance 1 19 74 27 948 Onen Cannertinn Failed For Instance 1 Tnvalid Senment Tyne nr Seament Value in Path gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 115 Allen Bradley PLC Setup 4 When the Add Class1 Connection dialog pops up select
197. e to user defined conditions 2 An array of status LEDs on the side of the imager Green Flash Mode Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read wy Targeting Disabled Green Flash Duration Good Read Beeper Static Presentation Match Mismatch ISCUIEC 16022 Grade Ctrobe LED Configuration Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred An array of green LEDs in the front of the imager can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchcode is enabled and a match occurs 5 102 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Static Presentation Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read mode When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the imager is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read mode When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the imager is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Stat
198. e upon which a linear or 2D symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object A 126 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip VLSI See Very Large Scale Integration Watchdog Timer A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the imager QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 127 Glossary of Terms A 128 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual
199. ead or Continuous Read 1 Output the imager is always in the read cycle End of Read Cycle SE Tio Read Cycle Timeout nae New Trigger Timeout or Hew Trigger Last Frame Last Frame or New Trigger Timeout Typically used with Continuous Read 1 Output and Serial Data and Edge It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Timeout ends the read cycle causing the imager to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output Symbol Data is set to End of Read Cycle Ifin Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 53 Read Cycle New Trigger New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the imager at irregular intervals not timing dependent New Trigger ends the curre
200. earn Status lt G gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status lt C gt Enter Decodes Second Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test lt J gt Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests Reboot System lt reboot gt Cold Boot System from Boot Code Static Validation lt VAL gt Perform Static Validation of Data Matrix Symbol lt I1 gt Activate Targeting System Standard QX Hawk only Targeting lt 10 gt De activate Targeting System Standard QX Hawk only Y Modem Transfer Options lt uy path and image file name gt Y Modem Upload lt dy key gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Y Modem Download Code A 77 Protocol Commands Appendix F Protocol Commands Communication Protocol Command Table Control Characters fancenic displayed on menu Serial coninanay os Value Effect of Command RES D 04 Reset REQ TE 05 Request EOT D 04 Reset STX B 02 Start of Text ETX AC 03 End of Text ACK a 06 Acknowledge NAK AU 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission A 78 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX HOST_TX disabled disabled disable
201. easeeees 1 2 Step Z COMMECH the Syster sereia a ts ieee te steed tece aces daheat tebe E a aa 1 4 Step a POSINOM MG Mager aaua none Gan 28 Se Aa rose nee stoned tence catcecmscan dan sence cee eeaee ene eeenes 1 6 py Ce aL ao Sr heen ee E eee eae ae eee 1 7 SIEM OD SElOC MOG liicetcs tei s tee a a a AE E eakew ext bocce raced Ge aoe 1 8 DISD O CONNEC e a Beast r eek acamaray case ed cous sea ascites ai eecent asd aeaaee eaten at ansies aed uaaeaceenes 1 10 Sloep Locate 5 V0 DO laa ae foe sate oc ana tcsccreae deters ens cece teeta a ee cubated ee bade 1 12 Step S Wk Oy irs 1h See een ne ene nn Rn ner a a eee eee ee eae 1 14 Slep 9 Test Read Rate wei cnet ec Ae oc od a eater eater etal ane 1 15 Step l0 Congre the Mage ainan ek nea ct en iia E Nh tea lel 1 16 SCD II Save Changes sires acti aera eel e ye od ote he ed a ae Teac eee 1 17 This section explains how to set up and test the QX Hawk quickly using ESP Easy Setup Program Detailed setup information for installing the imager into an application can be found in subsequent sections 1 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Check Hardware Step 1 Check Hardware Standard QX Hawk Item Description Part Number 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager FIS 6800 XXXXG QxX 1 Interface Device 98 000103 02 QX Cordset Common M12 12 pin Plug to M12 12 pin Socket 1 m 61 000162 01 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug to DB9 1 m 61 00015
202. ec Code can encode up to 3 832 numeric or 3 067 alphabetical characters or 1 914 bytes of data The level of Reed Solomon error correction used with Aztec Code is configurable from 5 to 95 of the total data region The recommended error correction level is 23 of symbol capacity plus codewords Aztec Code Disabled wt DO ijsabled Enabled Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode Aztec symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode Aztec symbols 5 94 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Composite When set to Enabled or Required will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Composite Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator i Enabled If Composite is set to Enabled the imager will decode both the 2D composite and linear components However if the 2D composite component is not decoded the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required If set to Required the imager must decode both components or a No Read will occur Separator Status Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Separates the linear and the composite component Separator Status Disabled B i fa b d Enabled Separator The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the
203. ect failure 4 0 Host Aux port buffer overflow Imager is in a read cycle 3 Under Binary interpret 1s as true and Os as not true For example bit 1 has a 1 in the Binary column indicating Command Received Bit 5 is also a 1 indicating that the Imager is in a read cycle ACC Colololololololo sae ooooe4a4soo0050 a cae 9 a a cme a om oY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 A B C D E F lt K gt All Status Request This is the fastest way to learn the imager s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Request This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 25 Imager Status lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt
204. ed Store Wo Read Image Image Storage Type Disabled Image Storage Mode First Image First Image Last Image QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 59 Read Cycle Image Processing Settings Number of Symbols in Field of View Any Number of Symbols No limit on number of symbols attempted to decode in an image frame One Symbol Only one symbol will be decoded in an image frame and this will be regardless of any qualifying attributes associated with the read cycle Any Mumber of Symbols Any Number of Symbals One Symbol Image Processing Settings Number of Symbols in Foy Image Processing Timeout Image Processing Timeout Specifies the maximum amount of time allowed for image processing to spend on a captured image When the time out expires the image processing is aborted This time out works in both rapid capture and continuous capture modes as well as with the configuration database H Image Processing Settings Humber of Symbols in FOY Sov Number of Symbols Image Frocessing Timeout s000 i 1 65535 x1 ms Notes The time out period does not include capture time If a time out occurs the image will be recorded as a No Read This may cause some confusion because the image may decode fine given enough time 5 60 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Symbologies Parameters 7 Parameters Click the App Mode button and then th
205. ed None Service hex e Class thes 4 Instance hex 301 Attibute hex 3 Member ther SymbolTa9 oo Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space ie Oa 26 f9 ge 1 0 16 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 10 10 5 234 Device status Trigger count control Sequence Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ge 00 00 OO OO 01 OO OO OO 01 OO OO OO 01 OO OO OO OO OO 00 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 O00 O00 OO OO 0O 00 OO OO 00 O00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy 12 16 15 33 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec R 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 02 38 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 14 12 56 270 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 22 18 610 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 102 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 119098 Sent pkt
206. ed 1 Enabled Check Character Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 47 Serial Commands Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Full ASCII Set Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status
207. ed and EAN output formatting applies Application Record Separator Status Disabled B l 2g b l E d x Enabled Application Record Separator Character This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Application Record Separator Character NUL SOH ST ET EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF vT FEI cR so si DLE Dc1 Dc2 De3 Dca mak SYN ETE CAN EM SUB ESC Fs Gs fs us SP Click Delete to remove characters Application Record Brackets If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Application Record Brackets Disabled Disabled Enabled Application Record Padding This feature causes the imager to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Application Record Padding Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 70 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters BC412 BC412 Disabled Check Character Qutpuk Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Check Character Output Status Disabled The imager will strip the verified check digit from the symbol data Enabled The imager will format the verified check digit as part of the symbol data Br412 Disabled Check Character Qukput Status Disabled w
208. ed as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Top O to 960 height Default 0 Left O to 1280 width Default 0 Height 3 to 960 top Default 960 Width 8 to 1280 left Default 1280 Symbol Type This field allows the user to configure the database to operate on specific symbol types for selected database index Symbol type specific parameters must be configured with the appropriate symbol type command For example fixed length Code 128 is required it must be set up with the Code 128 command lt K474 gt To configure a symbol type simply add the number value associated with the symbol type to the field parameter Example If Data Matrix and Code 39 are required the parameter would be 2 16 18 Disabled When disabled the database uses the current Symbol Type setup to determine active symbol types Any Type All of the preceding symbol types except Pharmacode are enabled while this database index is being used lt K255 gt Add 1 Data Matrix If enabled Data Matrix will be active for this database index Important The ECC Level must be configured using the Data Matrix command lt K479 gt If no ECC level has been configured then it will not decode a Data Matrix symbol lt K255 gt Add 2 QR Code If enabled QR Code will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 4 4 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imag
209. een a reader and symbol Auxiliary Port RS 232 connection to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing Blooming A situation in which too many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel The pixel overflows and causes the photons to go to adjacent pixels Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography except that in digital imaging the result is a number of vertical and or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Capture The act of acquiring and storing video images in an imager or host computer Also the image captured CCD See Charge Coupled Device A 122 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Charge Coupled Device CCD A semiconductor device with an array of light sensitive elements that converts light images into electrical signals Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity CMOS See Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CMOS Like CCDs CMOS imagers include an array of photo sensitive diodes one diode within each pixel Unlike CCDs however each pixel in a CMOS imager has its own individual amplifier integrated inside Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins
210. eh oa 6 3 SONO aaa a Ne ee 6 4 MacOS cla a es aaa E ee es ales 6 5 Terminal Window Me nus ccccccssccceeecceeeeceeeeceseecaeesaeeesueeesaeessusensas 6 6 Chapter 7 Utilities Serial Utility COMM ANG Sesh selond saeies a sb aE a Eih 7 2 FRO AG RAC sce i ee a daca A cues onuece ae nade aes em eae cae 1 4 COUET Se atest ac ecient acces a tnnccn saint Pacer asa esaneeean een een nee autentaee poe 7 6 DEVICE COMMON 233 ci sereecssthasiesetses cores ae etcctis nee eetes searecda teh teas sb Steien 7 9 Differences from Defaullt ccccccceccccssececeeeceseeeeeseeeeeesaeeesseeessaaeees 7 10 Master Database sisri a edness Reco eaeeede 7 11 PrN NS 3a ca otic sari sats areal eats a eu Stee ohdvesa E a ieee 1 17 Bar Code Configuration MOde cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaaees 7 21 Calibratie 7 22 Default Reset Save ccccccccccccccccesceeceeceeceeceeeeeeeecsuacesseaeessaaeeesaeeetsagees 7 23 mager S LAWS oseere E dee cseua Sasi tea Aazeete 7 25 Learn Operations ce scorseccsi ec a A A 7 27 FREDOOL SV SIC MN sescc cece cris eck oct csceedcceptcettae aA 7 28 Statie V All AAU OM iss free etee cs cen acesteans a 7 29 WARS UNG sae oewone asodea c E N 7 31 Y Modem Transfer Options ccccecccceeececeeseeeeeeeeeeaueeeseeeceseeseesaneees 7 32 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications cccccccccseeeceseeeeeseeeeeseeseesseeeeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications ccc
211. enccantedan cans sacascevedsnpanaccesnneacaseacentenssisacuncecunceranesaceeceanannce 2 16 This section explains the basic structure and elements of ESP Easy Setup Program When ESP is opened unless otherwise specified in ESP Preferences the EZ Mode view will appear App Mode contains several tree controls Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics a Setup interface a Terminal interface and a Utilities interface ESP can be used to configure the QX Hawk in three different ways e Graphic User Interfaces Imager settings can be configured using such point and click tools as buttons spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions e Tree Controls Each tree control contains a list of all command settings that pertain to that specific area of imager operation Each parameter can be configured using dropdown menus or fields where characters can be entered e Terminal ESP s Terminal allows the user to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the imager by typing them in the provided field Information about using specific commands in ESP is provided in subsequent sections For ESP system requirements see Minimum System Requirements in Chapter 1 Quick Start QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode EZ Mode allows the user to test read rate and calibrate the imager After connecting to the imager the EZ Mode view will appear
212. ence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card r Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Sequence Step Mew Master Pin Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 Sequence on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 Sequence on mismatch 006 ghi 007 Sequence on mismatch 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 5 172 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Sequence Step When the master symbol is sequenced incremented decremented Sequence Step defines the magnitude of change Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card t Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 32768 Mew Master Pin Disabled New Master Pin lf Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and t
213. ength Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 54 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Decode at End of Read Cycle PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fi
214. equential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin Master Symbol lt K225 status gt lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Hours Since Reset Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Output Filter Enable lt K745 number of filters gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Serial Command Format Microscan readers are controlled by two types of serial commands configuration commands and utility commands Rules that apply to both configuration and utility commands e Less than lt and greater than gt angle bracket characters enclose the commands e Commands and data are case sens
215. er 5 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual TCP Port 1 Parameters One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the imager The default setting is 2001 Ethernet IP Address Subnet hateway IP Address Mode E TLF Port 1 Symbol Data Qukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCF Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Symbol Data Output Enabled 192 166 0 100 fo oo LO 0 0 0 0 DHi_P 2001 1024 65535 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command z003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 1 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 19 Communication TCP Port
216. er bottom section may be added The 4 state format allows the symbol to contain more information and makes it easier to decode 4 state symbols can also be printed easily in a variety of media including dot matrix inkjet and laser lf U S Postal and USPS4CB Status are both enabled the imager will decode USPS4CB symbols USP54 6 Status Enabled w Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 87 Symbologies POSTNET Allow B and B Fields lf U S Postal and POSTNET are enabled and POSTNET Allow B and B Fields is enabled the imager will allow B and B fields in POSTNET symbols POSTHET Allow B and 6 Fields Disabled bi izabled Enabled Australia Post Allow 0 FCC If Australia Post is enabled and Australia Post Allow 0 FCC is enabled the imager will allow 0 FCC in Australia Post symbols Australia Post Allow 0 FOC Disabled w DO isabled Enabled 5 88 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters GS1 DataBar Note GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as Reduced Space Symbology or RSS DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 DataBar Limited Disabled DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DataBar Expanded Note DataBar Expanded was previously known as RSS Expanded Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other appli
217. er s Manual 5 29 Communication External Data Routing External Data Routing settings configure the global operation of all external data port settings Se External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port Disabled Armbles to Source Transparent Echo to Source Half Duplex Full Duplex Output at End of Read Cycle Custom Mutour at ET Oukput at Tireout 200 External Data Routing Options Transparent Mode When Transparent Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Enabled Output at ETX Fixed to Enabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Enabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled 5 30 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Mode of Operation Source Port data will echo back to itself Source Port data will always pass through even when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host Whenever ETX is received on the Source Port or symbol data is generated the data will be send to the Destination Port with its data appearing between the Preamble and symbol data Source Port data will always be sent to the Destination Port with a Preamble and Postamble Symbol data will be sent t
218. er User s Manual Parameters Read Duration Output Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Output Disabled Separator i Separator User defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Separator NUL S0H STX ETX EOT ENG ack BeL Bs HT LF vt rE s0 _s pue pen Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 101 I O Parameters Output Indicators E Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Always On Green Flash Curation 100 Beeper Good Read LED Configuration ISOVIEC 1602 Grade Final Grade The QX Hawk has a beeper and two LED arrays as follows 1 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the imager that can be programmed to flash in respons
219. er User s Manual Setup Code 128 If enabled Code 128 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 8 Code 39 If enabled Code 39 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 16 Codabar If enabled Codabar will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 32 Code 93 If enabled Code 93 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 64 Interleaved 2of 5 If enabled Interleaved 2of 5 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 128 UPC If enabled UPC will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 256 PDF417 If enabled PDF417 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 512 MicroPDF417 If enabled MicroPDF417 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 1024 BC412 If enabled BC412 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 2048 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 27 Configuration Database Pharmacode If enabled Pharmacode will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 4096 DataBar 14 If enabled DataBar 14 will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 8192 DataBar Limited If enabled DataBar Limited will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 16384 DataBar Expanded If enabled DataBar Expanded will be active for this database index lt K255 gt Add 32768 Micro QR Code If enabled Micro QR Code will be activ
220. er of characters in the symbol data Format Insert Output Index Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the required output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until the string is complete Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Options 1 to 100 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 71 Serial Commands Length Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output three commands with consecutive index numbers would be required where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database ent
221. er to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables 1 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start QX Hawk C Mount Item Description Part Number 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager FIS 6800 XXXXG 2 QX 1 Interface Device 98 000103 02 3 QX Cordset Common M12 12 pin Plug to M12 12 pin Socket 1 m 61 000162 01 4 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug to DB9 1 m 61 000152 01 5 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket to DB9 1m 61 000153 01 6 QX Power Supply M12 12 pin Socket 1 3 m 97 000003 01 7 QX Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug to RJ45 1 m 61 000160 01 8 QX Photo Sensor M12 4 pin Plug NPN Dark On 2 m 99 000020 02 9 QX Cordset C Mount to Smart Series Light not shown 61 000207 01 Note Additional cordsets and accessories are available in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Note The QX Hawk C Mount does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain My My ITI Common ommon 12 pin Plug 12 pin Plug Host to 12 pin Socket to 12 pin Ethernet 8 p
222. eral Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The QX Hawk has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the following requirements General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 ITE Immunity Standard Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment EN 55022 98 ITE Disturbances The QX Hawk has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual vil Statement of ROHS Compliance Statement of ROHS Compliance All Microscan readers with a G suffix in the FIS number are ROHS Compliant All compliant readers were converted prior to March 1 2007 All standard accessories in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog are ROHS Compliant except 20 500013 01 and 98 000039 02 These products meet all the requirements of the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for ROHS compliance In accordance with the late
223. erences from Default Settings The symbol will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog 2 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Navigating in ESP To change imager settings or to access the Setup Terminal or Utilities views click the App Mode button To return to EZ Mode click the EZ Mode button EZ Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls Parameters ESP Values Communications RSZ 4 R5232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled The X Ethernet Enabled indicates 1 Left click on the to expand Protocol Selection Point to Point that the setting is menu items External Data Routing Disabled default 2 Double click the desired Array Communication Modes Disabled parameter and single click gt N Disabled in the selection box to view Preamble Characters options Postamble ir 3 Place the cursor in the selection box scroll down 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the to the desired setting and selection single click the setting _ 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the imager The command can be sent without saving or sent and saved simultaneously Receive Reader Settings l Send and Save Default Current Menu Settings Default all ESP Settings Advanced Options d
224. es include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from Host to Imager TX to Imager STX lt command gt ETX LRC Response from Imager ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled Command Response from Imager to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detected depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the imager can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix F for sample ACK NAK communication scenarios 5 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Polling Mode Options These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Aux
225. essage will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position 4 36 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Output Format Enable Output Format This is a global enable disable parameter Use Set Number of Symbols and Output Phrase to assign symbols for formatting and Symbol Parse to determine the specific output content for the assigned symbols On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Enable Output Format Auto Sync with Reader Set Number of Symbols 1S Output Phrase Prearnible Symbol 1 Postarnble Enable Parse Enable Parse Symbols send and Save Quality Parameters P Show Parse Table QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 37 Output Format Set Number of Symbols Number of Symbols determines the number of symbols to which output formatting will apply Output Phrase Output Phrase refers to the user defined Preamble selected symbols and Postamble sequence in the read cycle result Enable Output Format Set Humber of Symbols aT e Output Phrase Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to determine the number of symbols to be included in the output p
226. etwork protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected V Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address x IP address Select Use the following IP address to set EE AEI the IP Address Subnet and Gateway Subnet mask 5 255 0 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server A 90 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix Using EtherNet IP This Appendix describes the Microscan QX Object Model Throughout this document this port will referred to as the EIP Overview The EIP interface will be identified as a Generic Device 0x00 The interface is designed to support remote serial transmit and receive using explicit unconnected messaging Necessary Tools The following tools are helpful for configuring the EIP e EtherNet IP Messaging Tool can be a PLC or Software Tool must be capable of sending explicit messages and establishing Class 1 connections EIPScan is an example of such a tool Te
227. external_inputs QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN mismatch_cnt 0 Decimal DINT H QxHawk_external_outputs OXHawk_IO_big_pt IN noread_cnt 0 Decimal DINT E aes _ OXHawk_IO_big_ptlN symb_str 123456789012vF0007 0118 str128 EH jawk_IN_small_u T A OxHawk_10_big_udt H QxHawk_10_big_pt OUT anai l QXHawk_OUT_udt E OXHawk_IO_small_udt E 0xHawk_I0_big_pt 0UT usertag 643 Decimal DINT Ei QXHawk_OUT_udt QXHawk_IO_big_ptOQUT command NA QXHawk_command Strings QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command trigger O Decimal BOOL a str126 QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command new_master 0 Decimal BOOL E ee QXHawk_10_big_pt OUT command res2 Ol Decimal BOOL QxXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res3 0 Decimal BOOL _ QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res4 0 Decimal BOOL QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res5 Oo Decimal BOOL QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res6 ol Decimal BOOL QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command res 0 Decimal BOOL __ QXHawk_IO_big_pt OUT command disable_scan Oo Decimal BOOL 4 gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags 4 gt Ready This confirms that two way communication with QX Hawk is successful It is left to the programmer to move or modify the CPS instructions in the Main Program according to the application s requirements Operation of the data fields within the assemblies is described in the object model documentation A 113 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Allen Bradley PLC Setup EIPScan Setup This procedure is for the
228. f equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes hr pate Ee Ae Fao CNT wut Tin oe Mine Srey oth SRS Ge ps Per a Be OE Pt Po Mare Sn AR whe RY ud ET HERNET F i i i o gm Ste thy oe oS o OS w a a de o et er eee a GS o oa wegs ar g DEVICE 5 F ee ee ee a POWER o fe lt 3 a Bi eo wef 6i ce fy et ew Oe bo et a ee a a a L SUPPLY o L ee es a ee ee ee a a ee ane ane A E a a p he i vie 2 RSDGI F492 4 85 Soe eee 8 ee ee tS km Re alee re n DEVICE 2 a acuine anne An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the imager Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host imager and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground A 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering SF Shunt Filtering POWER RETURN EARTH 3 TERMINAL POWER SUPPLY POWER Q 7e POWER GHD Q POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER RETURH SUPPLY EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD
229. f from manufacturers such as Turck Lumberg Phoenix Contact or Binder The QX Hawk uses sealed circular connectors with Ultra Lock technology Ultra Lock connectors are more resistant to harsh industrial conditions and are easy to connect Ultra Lock Connectors Microscan has adopted Ultra Lock connectivity because of speed ease of use and ingress protection considerations The main advantage of the Ultra Lock system is that only two steps are required at every connection point 1 Align the connector and receptacle keys 2 Push the connector into place Do not twist the connector as this can bend the pins Ultra Lock connectors are operator independent This means that they are not subject to under tightening or over tightening both of which are common problems with screw down connectors and both of which undermine the moisture resistant seal ULTRA LOCK s RADIAL SEAL A UNDER TIGHTENING f OVER TIGHTENING Operator independent Axial Compression Seal Axial Compression Seal Reliable watertight is incomplete allowing can become damaged constant pressure seal moisture to penetrate so moisture can enter and create shorts Ultra Lock Connector Traditional Threaded Connectors Another advantage of the QX Hawk s Ultra Lock connectivity scheme is that the Ultra Lock receptacles on the imagers and the QxX 1 Interface Device also accept screw down connectors giving users the flexibility to use either Ultra Lock or
230. f the discrete output Output 1 Parameters Gutput On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Normally Opern Output Mode Normally Closed Pulse Width Sets the time that the discrete output remains active Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output Skate Normally Coen Pulse width 0 500 Seconds Output Mode Pulse Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 1 Parameters Qutput On Mismatch or Wo Read Gutput State Normally Open Pulse width S00 QGutput Mode Pulse Pulse Latch Mode 7 Unlatch Input 1 Pir Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin transitions Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid wi
231. filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable output filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 5 then filter indexes 1 2 3 4 and 5 will be applied QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 33 Ordered Output Filter Number This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position Symbology Type Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Length Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Wildcard This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Placeholder The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Matching Data This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data
232. ger User s Manual 5 143 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 2 Parameters Output Gr Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger 0 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires 5 144 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 E Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Oukput on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Frink Growth Disabled Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled Output on Unused ECE Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade 7 Print Growth Threshold Grade Z Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Grade Z Unused ECC Threshold Grade Z Output on Symbol Contrast The symbol contrast is form
233. ggers 5 132 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Number of Triggers Parameters The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 1 Parameters Mutoue On Mutpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Number to Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open 00 Pulse Mo Read D 0 255 O T Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 1 Parameters Mutpur On Outpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Qutpuk On Decodes per Trigger QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open SOL Pulse No Read 0 255 5 133 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of t
234. gnores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Mon Delirmnited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Won Delirmnited NUL NUL SOH STX ETx EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF cR so s1 DLE Der Dc2 Dca Dca NAK SYN ETB caN EM Sue ESC FS GS As us se Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 51 Read Cycle Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be decoded before symbol data is output and a good read is declared Decodes Before Gutput 1 255 5 52 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters End of Read Cycle The read cycle is the time during which the imager will attempt to decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout or a new trigger or a combination of the two End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout 200 End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous R
235. gt Initiate Unlearn Operation lt LEARN gt Display Learn Status lt G gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status lt C gt Enter Decodes Second Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test lt J gt Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests Reboot System lt reboot gt Cold Boot System from Boot Code Static Validation lt VAL gt Perform Static Validation of Data Matrix Symbol lt l1 gt oe Targeting System Standard QX Hawk TAANI lt 10 gt De activate Targeting System Standard QX Hawk only lt uy path and image file Y Modem Upload Y Modem Transfer KAMET Options lt dy image file name gt Y Modem Download Image lt dy key gt Y Modem Download Code QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Read Rate Read Rate i Click the Utilities button and then the Read Rate tab to Utilities display the Read Rate view ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help So v y EARI Autoconnect Send Recw Switch Model to Cs Terminal Decodes sec To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button and then the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button To end a Read Rate test click the Stop Read Rate information is displayed in button the Start button becomes a Sto
236. having the specified length Symbal Length 10 0 64 r 5 68 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EAN Status When this field is disabled the imager will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the imager can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command If EAN status is required the imager will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Output Format In Standard the imager will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the imager will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Output Format Standard Standard QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 69 Symbologies Application Record Separator Status When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decod
237. he IN assemblies Trigger 0 Edge event driven Takes effect when read mode is Serial Edge or Level A transition from 0 to 1 is a rising edge trigger event A transition from 1 to 0 is a falling edge trigger event The following sources all induce trigger events in the reader including e A serial command from a serial com port e EZ button e External Trigger input signal on connector A e Command Trigger bit in the OUT assembly If the reader is to be exclusively triggered by the PLC then all other trigger sources must be kept idle New Master 1 Edge event driven A transition from 0 to 1 is a command to the unit similar to sending the lt G gt serial command or activating the New Master input on connector A When activated the New Master function instructs the reader to store the next decode in the master symbol database Disable Scanning 8 Operates the same as the lt H gt and lt I gt commands A transition from 0 to 1 is the same as sending an lt I gt command which issues a disable event A transition from 1 to 0 is the same thing as sending an lt H gt command which issues an enable event Note that the most recent command either lt H gt or lt I gt serial commands or the Camera Action DisableScanning command will always override the previous scanning disable state To verify scanning status observe the DeviceStatus field in asm Ox65 A 96 QX Hawk In
238. he image will be surrounded by an area of interest box a dashed blue line with red anchor points that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box and can be resized by clicking and dragging the anchor points good 754 0 60 ms r Evaliate C Line Scan Histogram Results Max Light 192 Min Dark 16 Median 69 Mean 67 High Peak 1 Lon Peak 34 Wumber of Pixels Variance 646 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 19 Evaluation Line Scan 1 2 4 20 From the Evaluation tab click the Line Scan button A window like that shown below will appear Drag your cursor horizontally across the image This will create a dashed horizontal line Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and light pixels will be displayed below the image good 787_0 60 ms Evaluate Histogram White 255 Finel Into Average M A Dige 0 0 Position N A Black 0 J P tastin taath Aa When you center your cursor over the dashed line it becomes a double arrow cross This allows you to move the line anywhere in the window You can also use your keyboard arrows to move the line incrementally in any direction As with the histogram the line scan compares light and dark pixels but in a spatial distribution On the Y axis of the graph below 0 is black and 255 is white the X axis represents the hor
239. he new master pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read starting with Index 1 The Master Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Master Symbol Database Size parameter Makchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Stark Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card a Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Mew Master Pin Disabled DO jsabled Enabled New Master Load Status The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example f the user has the Master Symbol Database Size set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 173 Matchcode Match Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is
240. he read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 1 Parameters Gutput On Mismatch or No Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Qutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger D L U 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires 5 134 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 E Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Oukput on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Frink Growth Disabled Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled Output on Unused ECE Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade 7 Print Growth Threshold Grade Z Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Grade Z Unused ECC Threshold Grade Z Output on Symbol Contrast The symbol contrast is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled ka Disabled Enabled Output on Print Growth The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Print Growth Disabled w izabled Enabled Out
241. he selected index Shutter Speed QX Hawk C Mount CCD Sets the camera s shutter speed 60 150 000 default 2 500 for the selected index Gain CMOS Sets the camera s gain 0 33 default 20 for the selected index Gain CCD Sets the camera s gain 0 64 default 20 for the selected index Focal Distance Standard QX Hawk Only Sets the camera s focal distance 25 4 000 default 80 for the selected index Sub Sampling Standard QX Hawk Only Sets the sub sampling rate 4 1 or 16 1 Disabled by default for the selected index Important Sub Sampling has no effect when the Image Dimension mode is configured as Region of Interest in the Database Mode command This is because the camera Window of Interest is determined by the software based on the database ROI setup and there is no benefit to sub sampling to increase speed as the frame size would have to be increased to account for the sub sampling Top Left Height Width CMOS The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Top 0 to 480 height Default 0 Left O to 752 width Default 0 Height 3 to 480 top Default 480 Width 8 to 752 left Default 752 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 25 Configuration Database Top Left Height Width CCD The image dimension settings can be appli
242. her information about setting up TCP IP with a PC see Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Qukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCF Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Enabled 192 166 0 100 aco ao U0 0 0 0 0 DHCP 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual IP Address Enter the IP address of the imager in this field Ethernet IP Address Subnet atewiay IP Address Mode TEF Port 1 Symbol Data Oukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TEF Port 2 Symbol Data Cubpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Foabled 192 168 0 100 feo fet LL 0 0 0 0 DHiLP z001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command z003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 15 Communication Subnet Enter the Subnet address of the imager in this field Ethernet Enabled IP Address 197 168 0100 Subnet 255 255 0 O Gateway U U U U IP Address Mode DHCP TCP Port 1 2001 Symbol Data Gukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command
243. however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Steps for Entering and Using Master Symbols 1 Set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits the application 3 Define the type of output required with Matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols required 5 Decide how the master symbol s will be entered a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of lt K231 master symbol data gt c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 167 Matchcode Matchcode Type Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data Mabchcode Matchcode T
244. hrase Symbol Symbol 1 Separator L Preamble Enable Parse Symbol 2 Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble Parse Parse Parse Parse Enable Enter Postamble characters by double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator Enter Postamble characters by double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator Check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols to SoH sTx ETX EoT ENO ACK BEL Bs HT f F EEEE 5 DCI Dc2 DC3 DCA aK SYN ETB CAN Em sual Esc _Fs GS Ps us sP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel 4 38 be formatted Postamble CR LF B SoH sTx ETx EoT Engl ACK BEL Bs HT F aa s1 De1 Dez Desf Deal INAK SYN ETB CAN Em sue Esc FS Gs RS US SP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Symbol Parse Extract _SendandSave Receive Symbol Parse Hide Parse Table Build Sequence ie Step Insert Data Extract Range Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract 2 4 Extract 5 4 The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command Sample Symbol E Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUYWY2Z01 23456789 Add Insert Step Add Extract Step Output BCD Clea
245. ial Commands Symbologies Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Aztec lt K458 status gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt Postal Symbologies lt K460 postal type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status Code 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC EAN lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator Status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt P
246. iates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshake protocol that allows a scanner to initiate data transfers to the host Point to Point with XON XOFF If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop 4S Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Used only with RS 232 This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF ACK NAK See ACK NAK Options Polling Mode see Polling Mode Options QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 23 Communication Address The Protocol Address can be any number between 1 and 50 Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 50 Protocol Port R5232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REQ NUL STX MUL ETS MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STs ETS ET ACK ALK HAK MAK Response Timeout 5 LEZ Status Disa
247. ic Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch Strobe The green flash will be used as an illumination strobe for image capture If it is required that the green flood is the only illumination for image capture then the internal illumination LED s can be disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 103 I O Parameters Targeting Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read ELE ee Always On v Green Flash Duration Always Off Beeper On only when Hot in Read Cycle LED Configuration On only when in Read Cycle ISQJIEC 16022 Grade Always On Always Off The targeting LEDs remain off On Only When Not In Read Cycle The targeting LEDs illuminate while the imager is not in a read cycle When a read cycle is entered the targeting LEDs will turn off they will come back on upon exiting On Only When In Read Cycle The targeting LEDs illuminate upon entering a read cycle and will turn off upon exiting the read cycle Always On The targeting LEDs are always illuminated Green Flash Duration Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred When a g
248. ields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 2 0 64 Guard Bar Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars is required for decoding to take place Useful when Interleaved 2 of 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads Guard Bar Disabled D i fa b E d x Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 73 Symbologies Range Mode Status Important Unless Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length must be set to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required When Range Mode is disabled the imager checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is
249. if the EZ Button is held down on power on the imager will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a lt Zrc gt command from ESP s Terminal Default On Power on Enabled Disabled Enabled Load Configuration Database Loads Configuration Database settings to the imager Enabled Disabled Load Contig DE Enabled Save for Power On Saves imager settings for Power On Disabled izabled Save For Power on Enabled 5 114 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EZ Button Modes Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Allows the user to program each of the EZ Button s 4 positions from a selection of 7 modes Single Beep Hold down button until a single beep is heard Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the
250. ight Firmware Yertication peta i fearon ES E Select the firmware App Code Boot Code Request Checksum 00000 DSP Code Kernel Code Request Part Number by Serial Command Note X base part number R revision number When lt gt a request for all part numbers is sent the imager returns lt al35 XXXXXX RR gt lt b 35 XXXXXX RR gt lt d 35 XXXXXX RR gt lt k 35 XXXXXX RR gt lt p Sys_Cfg_P N gt lt s SafeMode_P N gt When lt a gt a request for the application code part number is sent the imager returns lt al35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt b gt a request for the boot code part number is sent the imager returns lt b 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt d gt a request for the DSP code part number is sent the imager returns lt d 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt k gt a request for the kernel code part number is sent the imager returns lt k 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt p gt a request for the system configuration file part number is sent the imager returns lt p Sys_Cfg_P N gt When lt s gt a request for the SafeMode part number is sent the imager returns lt s SafeMode_P N gt 7 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Request Checksum Send a request to the imager for application code or DSP code checksums 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code or DSP Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Checksum button 3 Clic
251. iliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is configured in the lt K140 gt command To enable true multidrop protocol the RS422 485 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 485 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix F for sample Polling Mode communication scenarios Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 A J ATK l NAK Options RES MLL REQ MUL ST MUL ET MUL ALK ALK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EGT REQ ENG STs STs ET ETs ACE ALE MAK MAK Response Timeout J LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset EOT 0x04 REQ Request ENQ 0x05 STX Start of Text STX 0x02 ETX End of Text ETX 0x03 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 27 Communication Response Timeout Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the imager does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The imager can be set to wait indefinitely by set
252. ill automatically send all imager configuration settings chosen in ESP to the imager Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition In which Auto Sync will not automatically send imager settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the imager Show Target Pattern During Locate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Locate routine Show Target Pattern During Calibrate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Calibrate routine Use Higher Quality Images Sets ESP to output images at a higher resolution than standard JPEG format Open Image after Save When Open Image after Save is enabled ESP automatically opens saved image captures Images can be saved from the Evaluation tab in the Camera view or by right clicking an image in any other image capture view and then saving Send XON with Autoconnect sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the imager before starting the Autoconnect routine QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Advanced Tab cont Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting When enabled prompts the user to save a esp file when ending a session Q Save changes to session 9 esp File Edit View Tools Help Organize v Include in library v Share with Burn New folder ME Desktop Name te Favorites session 9 esp E My Documents jM Computer Connect to Readers vi
253. in Host Serial 12 pin Socket to DB9 5 Socket Plug to RJ45 1 2P ae Power Supply Y Power Supply 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor 6 Serial Standalone with QX 1 Ethernet Standalone with QX 1 Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 3 Connect the System Step 2 Connect the System Standard QX Hawk Important When connecting Ultra Lock cordsets to the QX Hawk and QX 1 align the pins first and then push the connector into place Do not twist the connectors as this will bend the pins Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain RS 232 e Connect the Serial Communication Cable from A on the QX Hawk to 2 on the QX 1 e Connect the host cable from 1 on the QX 1 to the host computer e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QxX 1 e Connect the power supply to 3 on the QX 1 e Plug in the power supply Ethernet Note The QX Hawk does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through
254. in applications that require several different imager configurations to be applied sequentially and it allows the user to perform far more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Active Indexes Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options wale Settings Processing Settings cnet STAs oper ee ec EE SE Disate O 2 ea fa lise oma lisabled Teszt 3 O4 75 Os ai Jisa 480 752 Te lisa Os ojo E a 1 Das Sa ase Ca O7 o fo Jo E Disa Ema Dicabed Tes Os b fo jeso 52 O3 ojo jaso 752 L O10 o Jo jaso 752 Capture for Ever Index Show Database Indes in Output Sort Indes Positions on Good Reads Load Current To Indes Load Indes To Curent Configuration Database view CMOS set for 5 Active Indexes with Capture Settings highlighted As soon as the number of active database settings is something other than 0 the database is enabled Once enabled the current configuration settings that are handled by the database have no impact on imager operation Capture Index Each index in the database 1 10 can be configured and tested individually 4 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Shutter Speed CMOS Sets the camera s shutter speed 60 40 000 default 2 500 for the selected index Shutter Speed Standard QX Hawk CCD Sets the camera s shutter speed 60 150 000 default 1 500 for t
255. ination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes RS 232A Baud Rate RS 232 A lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 3 4800 6 38 4K 9 230K QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 1200 2 2400 4 9600 5 19 2K T 57 6K 8 115 2K A 29 Serial Commands Parity RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 232 B Status RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K
256. ing facilities Progressive Scan A non interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices RAM See Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM A data storage system used in computers composed of integrated circuits that allow access to stored data in any sequence without movement of physical parts Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a reader will accept symbol input Read Only Memory ROM A data storage medium used in computers and other electronics primarily used to distribute Firmware Real Time Processing In machine vision the ability of a system to perform a complete analysis and take action on one part before the next one arrives for inspection Region Area of an image Also called a region of interest for image processing operations ROM See Read Only Memory Saturation The degree to which a color is free of white One of the three properties of color perception along with hue and value Scattering Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object Skew Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Substrate The surfac
257. iod of 25 triggers read cycles Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers Number to Qutput On Mo Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 152 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 3 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width 500 Qutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers lt 0 255 Humber to Output Cr T Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to
258. ion diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data RS 232 B Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 33 Serial Commands RS 422 Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt
259. ion of the upper left starting point of the image window If this value is changed and the resulting combination of column pointer plus column width exceeds the maximum allowed the column width will be decreased to an acceptable value El Window of Interest ia a E 0 1280 a Width 4 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Height Defines the size in rows of the image window Maximum value is defined as the Maximum row size of Image sensor minus the row pointer value A decrease in this value coupled with an increase in the row pointer value will cause an increase in frame rate at a resolution of 46 microseconds row period Ee Window of Interest Top T Left O 0 to 960 Top width 1 60 Width Defines the size in columns of the image window Maximum value is defined as the Maximum column size of Image sensor minus the column pointer value Changing this parameter will have no effect on frame rate Window of Interest Top T Left 0 Height 960 Width 1280 Sto 1280 Left QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 15 Camera Setup Image Processing Settings Image Processing Timeout See Image Processing Timeout in Read Cycle Capture Mode See Capture Mode in Read Cycle Morphological Pre Processing Morphological Pre Processing allows the user to select the method for processing images and to choose the operator size for that method Important This command must be set to Ena
260. ion record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application A 52 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status f
261. ions Note I O Parameters settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the I O Parameters section of Appendix E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 97 I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Symbol Data Output Status Disabled It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the imager to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks When set to Disabled the imager will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data When set to Match the imager transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a maste
262. is mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes per Trigger Threshold Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 A 64 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Trend Analysis Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostics Output 1 Service Unit Serial Cmd lt K790 service unit gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostics Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K791 service unit gt Diagnostics Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K792 service unit gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 65 Serial Commands Output 1 Parameters Output On Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or Good Read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 Validation 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle 8 Read Cycle Data Valid Output State Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Normally Open Options 0 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed Pulse Width Serial Cmd lt K810 outpu
263. isabled Decode Direction Qutput meer Enabled 5 158 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Symbol Quality tab to display the Symbol Quality tree control z Parameters Parameters ESP Values Symbol Quality B Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Qutput Mode Grade Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture ulus Milea s M Locate Time Disabled is the default Decode Time ened Pixels Per Element Enabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled To open nested To change a setting double click the options single click setting and use the cursor to scroll the through the options Note Symbol Quality settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 159 Symbol Quality Global Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Total Read Time When enabled outputs the amount of time that was required by the imager to decode the symbol E Global Total Read Time Disabled wt Symbol Quality Separator RS 5RRE Output Mode Enabled
264. itions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory B Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or No Read hn Output State Mismatch or No Read Pulse Width Match lor Good Read Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis No Read l Trend Analysis H Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality H Diagnostics Diagnostic Warring ln Read Cycle Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled 5 138 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters
265. itive Characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration Commands K Commands Microscan s serial configuration commands begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character comma separated command fields and an initializing command as follows lt Knumeric character data data etc gt lt initializing command gt An initializing command lt Z gt or lt A gt may follow the command e lt Z gt initializes the imager s memory and saves for power on e lt A gt initializes the imager s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions e All command fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space e NULL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier e All fields preceding a modified field must be included e If there is no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 7 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K10
266. ixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 53 Serial Commands Separation Factor Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Normal Options 0 Normal 1 High 2 Highest Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol L
267. izontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan When you click anywhere on the graph a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value in terms of black to white are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph 237 in this example In addition a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Calibration Setup The Calibration interface in ESP is a powerful and intuitive way to optimize the imager s performance It allows the user to control several complex simultaneous calibration operations and to follow the progress of those operations using cues such as progress bars real time representations of calibration values and other dynamic user feedback Before After V Auto Syne with Reader i Quality Beginning calibration Capture Settings Gain V Fixed A v A v Best Shutter Speed 2500 v Fixed Focal Distance Calibrate v Symbology Settings Symbol Calibration Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 gt MiFixed Composite Enabled Window of Interest WOl Framing Row and Column v WOI Margin 75 E Before After Auto Syne with Reader Best ae l Quality Beginning calibration Capture Settings Gain 20 Fixed Shutter Speed 2500 lt Fixed Focal Distance Calibrate
268. k the Request Checksum button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yertication o Select the firmware App Code DSP Code Request Checksum by Serial Command e When lt gt a request for all available firmware checksums is sent the imager returns lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt d DSP_CHECKSUM gt lt d CFG_CHECKSUM gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code checksum is sent the imager returns lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt e When lt d gt a request for the DSP code checksum is sent the imager returns lt d DSP_CHECKSUM gt e When lt p gt a request for the system configuration file checksum is sent the imager returns lt Id CFG_CHECKSUM gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 19 Firmware Request Build Number by Serial Command Note X base part number R revision number B build number e When lt gt a request for all part numbers is sent the imager returns lt a 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt b 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt d 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt k 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt p 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code build number is sent the imager returns lt a 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt b gt a request for the boot code build number is sent the imager returns lt b 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt d gt a request for the DSP code build number is sent the imager
269. l data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 99 I O Parameters No Read Message Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Foahled Message NORE AD No Read Message Status Disabled Only symbol data is output after a read cycle Enabled When the imager is in a triggered mode a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character No Read Message Foahled Message NORE AD 5 100 QX Hawk Industrial Imag
270. lank section of a tree control view QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 17 Send Receive Options 2 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E 3 Hardware Integration Contents ELAINE E go Pee E Nee ee ne we ee es E vc ee E A TO ee a rv ee Tere 3 2 COIS CS ira acne te carck een tines a E pee meee cette ee E E 3 3 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and PiINOUtS 20 0 0 ccc ecc cece ee eeeeeseeeeeueeeeaeeeeeeseueeeeaeeeeaueaaeees 3 4 POWer and TMoger SWItCMING toicc2escerebassts oe teencsenncesed E Pace EE E E 3 9 Fe OWE TS OUMUIING so fescaaecee vaste tna the wench samen beens mate Geccanseuied kak sane acu atau Dac a 3 10 PLD OIC ATION EXI MPIO S cesses dct hed ae fs asso usa A an since E se neemeetn den nceececeess 3 11 This section introduces the details of QX Hawk hardware and explains how that hardware can be integrated in an application 3 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Connectors Connectors Industrial cabling and connectivity schemes must be able to withstand environmental extremes of heat cold and moisture and be secure enough not to be disconnected or damaged inadvertently in the course of day to day operation The current industry standard for connectivity is a sealed circular connector such as the M12 The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC standard for M12 connectors describes them as fixed and free screw locking connectors This type of connector is widely available off the shel
271. ld down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight EZ Button Modes 5 112 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EZ Button Status ARE Button Enabled Disabled Enabled Trigger Unlatch Outputs Parameter switch Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ Button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ Button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Modes command Trigger When selected the EZ Button acts as a trigger for the imager to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout In External As with External Level External Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated Edge by pressing the EZ Button but unlike External Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatch Outputs In this configuration the EZ Button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 113 I O Parameters Default on Power On When enabled
272. le 135 mA at 24VDC typ Power Requirement CCD Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 170 mA at 24VDC typ QX Hawk C Mount CMOS Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 105 mA at 24VDC typ Power Requirement CCD Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 130 mA at 24VDC typ QX Hawk Connectors A is a Serial M12 12 pin plug It is the same for all models of the QX Hawk B is a serial M12 12 pin socket for serial models and an Ethernet M12 8 pin socket for Ethernet models Output 2 3 Default 1 New Master 4 Output 1 va i Output 3 6 Sui i i a 2 Power 10 RS 232 Host TxD Ground 7 12 Was AX 1 Trigger Input Common 8 9 RS 232 Host RxD Output Common A All Models M12 12 pin Plug Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Default Green 4 New Master Yellow 5 Output 1 Gray 6 Output 3 Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 RS 232 Host RxD Black 10 RS 232 Host TxD Violet 11 Output 2 Gray Pink 12 Output Common Red Blue Continued next page QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 11 Electrical Specifications QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts continued RS me RxD Input g RS 232 TxD Common 8 RS 232 RTS 1 Trigger Ground hae AL y ik 232 RxD RS 422 485 s 10 Y A LA 2 Power RS 422 485 5 TxD 11 Input 1
273. librate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On Default All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled To turn the targeting pattern off quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 118 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Status Indicators The QX Hawk features an array of LEDs that indicate various aspects of imager activity Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate Good Read To Qutpuk Active Oz Input Active Controls the operation of the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs S status Indicators PHY Activity Par Grapn Disabled I
274. lick the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Communication settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Communication section of Appendix E 5 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Port Routing The QX Hawk features a communication system based on Port Routing instead of traditional dedicated serial ports Decisions can be made about the direction and content of communication between ports based on different Data Types Any available port can be used in any combination The fundamental concept of Port Routing is that communication design can be based upon Data Types rather than ports The advantage of this is the ability to map different data types to different ports the user is no longer limited to a Host Port and Aux Port for specific types of input and output Since each port is independent instead of fixed for a particular purpose the imager behaves more like a data switch Standard QX Hawk Primary Cg ary Port Routing Primary Secondary Port Routing Command Data Extended Data 7 R5232 A Pemra 7 RS232 A pilots Deta Database Identifier Output 7 R5232 B vI RS232 B Read Duration Output J RS422 1 RS422 Symbology Identifier 7 TCP Port 1 Symbol Data 7 TCP Port 1 Extended Data V TCP Port 2 Diagnostic Data 7 TCP Port
275. ll output 5 130 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 131 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down
276. logical Pre Processing lt K550 status gt Morphological Operations lt K551 unused operation size gt External Illumination Mode I O Parameters Calibration Options Standard QX Hawk lt K553 mode gt lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type window of interest framing window of interest margin gt Calibration Options QX Hawk C Mount lt K529 gain shutter speed unused symbol type unused unused gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbo data output status when to output symbol data gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt Global Symbol Quality Output lt K708 quality output separator output mode gt ISO IEC 16022 Parameters lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity unused ECC gt Data Matrix Grading lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt ISO IEC 16022 Grade LED Display lt K737 unused LED
277. lows the user to select an area in the Field of View that the desired symbol will be located The programmable window of interest is useful for increasing decode speed improving threshold selecting desired symbol from multiple symbols in FOV The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size in both rows and columns to define the Window of Interest Important Notes e The column width value is required to be a modulus 32 value so regardless of the column width setting that is configured the actual column width will be decreased if required to a modulus 32 value For example a column width value of 632 would actually be 608 A user request of this setting would still return 632 e The column pointer is required to be an even value so regardless of the column pointer setting that is configured the actual column pointer will be decreased if required to an even value For example a column pointer value of 101 would actually be 100 A user request of this setting would still return 101 Top Defines the row position of the upper left starting point of the image window An Increase in this value will cause an increase in frame rate at a resolution of 46 microseconds row period If this value is changed and the resulting combination of row pointer plus row depth exceeds the maximum allowed the row depth will be decreased to an acceptable value E pi of Interest r s E n Height a width 12680 Left Defines the column posit
278. lts is checked in ESP Preferences 2 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Defaulting When Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings are selected only the ESP settings are defaulted Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration Save to Reader tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Settings Send Current Command This is the same as Send Current View except that it saves only the command that is currently selected Add Exception Remove Exception Advanced Options Send Current view Send Current Command Add Remove Exception After a Receive Reader Settings command is performed and the Add Exception option is selected a list of serial commands may appear These are commands that may be in the imager s firmware but are not included in or are different from the current version of ESP These commands can be edited by double clicking them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to the imager whenever a Save to Reader command is sent or when an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command is sent Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking in any b
279. lts Default Sticky Parameters and Save for Power On lt Zrc gt Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults and Save for Power On lt L1 gt Programmable Output 1 lt L2 gt Programmable Output 2 Device Control lt L3 gt Programmable Output 3 lt gt Disable Imager lt H gt Enable Imager lt gt Display All Part Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Part Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Part Number lt d gt Display DSP Code Part Number Firmware Checksum Display Kernel Code Part Number lt s gt Display SafeMode Part Number lt gt Display All Firmware Build Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Build Number 7 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities lt b gt Display Boot Code Build Number lt d gt Display DSP Code Build Number lt k gt Display Kernel Code Build Number Firmware Checksum lt l gt Display All Available Firmware Checksums lt la gt Display Application Code Code Checksum lt d gt Display DSP Code Checksum lt rb key gt Roll Back Application Code lt gt Imager Status Request lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Request imager Statue lt K gt All Range Request lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Request lt Knnnd gt Single Command Default lt LEARN gt Initiate Learn Operation Learn lt UNLEARN
280. m the last reset After 60 seconds Search and Configure Mode will be disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 21 Communication Protocol Selection In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communication standards Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the imager and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the imagers and a concentrator Note In all protocol modes the Preamble and Postamble character strings can be used to frame the decoded data and both are included in calculating the LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check S Protocol Selection Pointto Point Address Foint to Foint Frokocol Port Point to Point with ATS CTS Point to Point with sO Ns OFF Point to Point with ATS CTS and ON 0FF ACE NAE Polling Mode 5 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Protocol Options SE Protocol Selection Paoint to Point Address Point to Point Protocol Port Point to Point with ATSYCTS Point to Point with SOM s OFF Point to Point with ATS CTS and SON OFF ACE NE Polling Point to Point Standard Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Point to Point with RTS CTS A scanner init
281. mager User s Manual 5 11 Communication Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Eight Seven Eight Data Bits Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager Diagnostics Oukput Enabled g Disabled Enabled 5 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables RS 422 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 13 Communication Ethernet Enables or disables Ethernet connectivity in the imager Important For furt
282. mbol Locator Beeper Good Read Match Mismatch No Read serial command confirmation On Off A 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Light Collection Options Progressive scan square pixel Shutter Software adjustable 1 60 to 1 100 000 CMOS 1 30 to 1 100 000 CCD CMOS WVGA 752 x 480 pixels CCD SXGA 1280 x 960 pixels Laser Light Standard QX Hawk Type Laser diode Output Wavelength 655 nm nominal Operating Life 50 000 hours 25 C Safety Class Visible laser Class 1 Complies with 21 CFR 1040 10 CLASS 1 and 1040 11 except for deviations LASER PRODUCT pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated June 24 2007 Protocols Point to Point Point to Point with RTS CTS Point to Point with XON XOFF Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Multidrop Daisy Chain User Defined Multidrop Ethernet TCP IP EtherNet IP Electrical Standard QX Hawk CMOS Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 135 mA at 24VDC typ Standard QX Hawk CCD Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 170 mA at 24VDC typ QX Hawk C Mount CMOS Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 105 mA at 24VDC typ QX Hawk C Mount CCD Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 130 mA at 24VDC typ Discrete I O Input 1 Trigger New Master Bi directional Optoisolated 4 5 28V rated 13 mA at 24VDC New Master is to signal ground l ans Outputs 1 2
283. mbol data output from the imager Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager Diagnostics Oukput E nabled E Disabled Enabled 5 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the imager Note Command processing is always enabled for RS 232 A Data Data enables RS 232 A as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 7 Communication RS 232 B The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting R5232 B Enabled Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source P
284. meters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 137 I O Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected cond
285. mp MainProgram E Unscheduled Programs amp Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes G Add On Instructions amp Data Types Of User Defined E Strings i Add On Defined ir Predefined Module Defined i Trends amp 1 0 Configuration 6 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fla 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 3 1756 ENBT A eip Ctrl Create a module E Select Module os LPO4 AENT IA 1794 GENT B 2364F RGU EN1 im CrivelogixS 730 Ethernet ETHERNET BRIDGSE mE THERNET MODULE ETHERMET P4 amp NELYVIEV EtherNetfIP PowerFlex 4 E PowerFlex 40 E PowerFlex 40P E PowerFlex 70 EC E PowerFlex 70 E By Category By Vendor QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller Scope fla Mscanl ogix5561 Show Show AII lt gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags IKE hd a 4 Select ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module and click OK 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media 2364F Regen Bus Supply via 1203 EN1 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on DriveLogixS 730 Generic EtherMet IP CIP Bridge Generic Ethernet Module EthernetjIP Panelview SoftLogixS800 EtherketsIP PowerFlex 4 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 40 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 40P Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20 COMM E he F Find Add Favorite coed
286. n Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt lt K802 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt Symbol Quality Output 2 Symbol Quality Output 3 Output 1 Parameters lt K810 output on output state oulse width output mode gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 outout on output state pulse width output mode gt Output 3 Parameters lt K812 output on output state oulse width output mode gt Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Control Hex Output Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex Beeper Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 59 Serial Commands Quality Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per
287. n only be done with database because all other data is same 4 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Ordered Output Setup Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has settings for the following six parameters Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder Matching Data Decode Direction and Database Number Output Filter Settings dialog where settings can be changed Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder and Matching Data are all displayed in the table below Double clicking on any row of the table will display the Ordered Filter Sumbology Length Wildcard Placeholder Matching Data Number Tupe Any Type Any Type Any Type Any Type Any Type video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Auto Sync with Reader Decode Database Direction Number Either Any Either Any Either Any Either Any Either Any Receive settings from the imager Send settings to the imager or Send and Save settings Number of Filters Note These buttons only affect this view Send and Save Number of Filters refers to the number of active output
288. n set to Both the imager will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Check Character Type Disabled 5 76 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Check Character Output Status When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled the imager will strip the verified check character from the symbol data output This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the imager will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Check Character Qutpuk Status Disabled l z0 b E d Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 77 Symbologies UPC EAN Used primarily in point of sale applications in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan imagers in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental data following the normal symbol The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the produc
289. nce Time Between Captures 7 8 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Notes for Rapid Capture Timed Capture If rapid capture is configured for timed captures this delay is measured from the point at which the previous delay expired If the delay expires during a previous capture the start of the capture will occur as soon as the previous capture or captures complete For example if rapid capture is configured for 8 captures and all delays are configured for zero all 8 captures will occur back to back as fast as the imager is able Notes for Rapid Capture Triggered Capture If rapid capture is configured for triggered captures mode the delay taken is measured from the point at which the trigger for that capture is received Also if an incoming trigger occurs before a previous delay has expired the previous capture is initiated and the delay for the incoming trigger is started Important If the unit is triggered to capture more than 8 images the unit will repeat the last delay 8th for the remaining frames 5 58 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Store No Read Image Image storage allows the user to store images from separate read cycles and has the ability to retrieve them later The number of available slots for storage depends on the mode of operation If functioning in the rapid capture mode the number of images available to st
290. nce communication and I O user feedback EZ Button for setup and testing Compact size for easy integration into a wide variety of applications IP65 67 enclosure Imager Communication There are three ways to configure and test the QX Hawk Microscan s Windows based ESP Software Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal or another terminal program The EZ Button on the top of the imager Ultra Lock is a trademark of Woodhead Molex QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual V Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the f
291. nd held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output 5 140 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins
292. nds SJ 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 f 3 1756 ENBT A eip Ethernet 1756 ENBT A eip f ETHERNET MODULE QXHawk w 2 Program Tags MainProgram Scope Eg MainProgram Show Show All E MainProgram MainRoutine choose one CPS for choose one CPS for IN and OUT IN and OUT _small_pt or _big_pt _small_pt or _big_pt Synchronous Copy File awk l Source QXHawk l JN Dest QXHavk_lO_big_pt IN 1 Synchronous Copy File Synchronous Copy File Source QXHawk_lO_small_pt OUT Source QXHawk_lO_big_pt OUT Dest QXkHawk O Dest QXHawk O Length 1 Length 1 MainRoutine tye MainPrograrr Enter non BOOL file source operand Rung 0 of 2 PP WER A 108 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices 16 In this example the small assembly set has been kept f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsa a sael eA E sill mig ala Offline j mE RUN my Re Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 23a Backplane 0 S No Forces p OK Moea le la Hf tot ict ajja a er F I Li Favorites Aaron alarms K Si K TmeriCouter AT Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 5 Tasks cS a MainTask 3 MainProgram l z ES Ej MainProgram MainRoutine H choose one CPS for IN an
293. ne 0 v amp No Forces b th NoEdis alao 4 A et het se 0 2 F j z Ez D KI i Favorites A Add O Alarms Bit Timer Counter ky Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller I IA Controller Tags je r aa Controller adi Handler Scope fa MscanLogix5561_v Show Show All Power Up Handler x Tasks amp MainTask e MainProgram Unscheduled Programs J Motion Groups E Ungrouped Axes E Add On Instructions Sj Data Types User Defined Oa Strings i Add On Defined Ge Predefined a Module Defined Gi Trends J 1 0 Configuration 6 1756 Backplane 1756 44 fa 0 1756 L61 MscanLogix5561 3 1756 ENBT A eip Ethernet 4 gt Monitor Tags AEdit Tags lal rf Enter a tag name A 100 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Add QX Hawk by right clicking on the Ethernet interface and select New Module f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help elsa 2 ee o gt alalal fe ciel lal Offline D m RUN E EA Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 233 Backplane 0 z l No Forces gt ae a No Edits S mo K Aire E Se ES Redundea p 5 D KIA i Favorites Counte amp Controller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler amp Tasks SQ MainTask H a
294. ne exception is with the 1st database index a new image is always captured when the 1st database configuration is used When a camera setting has been modified from one database setting to the next a new image is captured For example if all database entries contained the same camera setting values but had different IP Decode configurations the only time an image frame would be captured would be when the 1st database configuration was used QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 31 Configuration Database Image Dimensions This feature defines how the image dimension parameters are implemented Window of Interest WOI In this mode the database image dimension parameters are Camera Settings and dictate the size of the image to be captured Region of Interest ROI In this mode the database image dimension parameters are Image Processing Decode Settings and specify the region or area of the captured image to be processed The ROI coordinate data is based on the full scale image size The WOI of the captured image will be configured to cover all the active database ROI settings In the following example there are three active database setting with different ROI configurations Their coordinates are based at point 0 0 of the full scale image SXGA 1280 x 1024 or VGA 640 X 480 The image WOI is not configurable it is automatically setup by the database based on the ROI settings This feature is intended to be used in conjunc
295. nection Instance 1 RPIs 20 20 Cyclic E Service hex Class hex 4 15 1413 12 11109 8 7 6 6 43 2 1 0 cccececcce o ca E Instance hex 301 Attribute hex 3 10 10 5 234 Member hex Symbol Tag Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Oa 26 f9 Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO 00 OO OO 0O OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO 00 OO O1 OO OO OO O1 OO OO 00 O1 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Oc OO 00 OO 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 OO OO 00 OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO CO 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 0000 00 00 OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0O 00 OO 00 OO 00 00 OO 00 00 OO 00 00 00 Timestamp Message o e 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 Ls 12 16 15 33 Connection closed with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 02 38 790 Co
296. nnection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 14 12 56 270 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 22 18 610 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recv Delay 32 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 10825 Sent pkts 13715 12 13 31 755 Error Request failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 18 20 45 53A 9 Connertion rinsed with Instance 1 1 Class1 connections active Max Recy Delay 32 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Max Recy API 25 35 Max Send API 20 01 lt In fact all bytes in the green OUT area will be echoed back in the blue IN area at the same location relative to the beginning of the assemblies Each byte and bit has a unique purpose Please consult the object model for a description Note that all data is displayed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 119 Allen Bradley PLC Setup in little endian order F ElPScan ElPscan qxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File View Request IO Stack Device 1IO Module Help DB o Target ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 Adapter 10 10 4130 x Host 10 10 4 130 QX HAWK Connection Instance 1 RPIs 20 20 Cyclic Request all fields are in hex Predefin
297. nse timeout gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protoco l port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Read Cycle l Trigger Trigger Filter Duration Serial Trigger Character lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing edge trigger filter duration gt lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character lt K229 start character gt Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Capture Mode QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual lt K241 mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt A 23 Serial Commands Capture Time lt K242 time before first capture time between 1 2 time between 2 3 time between 3 4 time between 4 5 time between 5 6 tim
298. nsferred by the imager Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Object Plane An imaginary plane in the field of view focused by an imager s optical system at the corresponding image plane on the sensor QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 125 Glossary of Terms Output A channel or communications line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the Substrate Pixel An individual element in a digitized image array picture element PLC See Programmable Logic Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector Processing Time The time used by a vision system to receive analyze and interpret image information Often expressed in parts per minute Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufactur
299. nt imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 86 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix G ASCII Table Dec Hex Mne Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX 67 43 C 99 63 C 04 04 EOT 68 44 D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ 69 45 E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK 70 46 F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL 71 47 G 103 67 g 08 08 BS 72 48 H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 105 69 i 10 OA LF J 106 6A j 11 0B VT K 107 6B k 12 OC FF L 108 6C 13 OD CR M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 110 6E n 15 OF SI O 111 6F O 16 10 DLE 0 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC
300. nt read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout or a new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Useful in applications in which the timeout duration varies Last Frame or New Trigger Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new object could appear before the last frame in the sequence Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Read Cycle Timeout Read Cycle Timeout determines the duration of the read cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Timeput Read Cycle Timeout 2 000 4 Seconds 5 54 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Capture Mode Capture mode specifies how multiple captures are taken and managed throughout a read
301. nual 7 Terminated TX a RX OC g V Aga sos O RX eoo ii A p an 3 Terminated B mene Models M12 8 pin Socket Function Terminated Terminated Terminated TX RX TX Terminated RX 4 TX l SI olala c o F QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts Grounding the QX Hawk Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes Po seg sty oa 2 cis mae Se a aia tet Oa wee Ep te hs Se wR So eee ae ok g ETHERNET wo 5 oe tee oP Si ee ce gt i fo das oaJ kn ok au aa COR ke a a ak OE pee ge Se RR ee eee ae OR ok T oy ee oo 2 OURS amp oo ay oe ae oe e be oe INS oe at age eee So SUPPLY YP r 2 l eee nae a me ee he ee ot nee RS232 422 485 Be ae eas E E we ek SB in cee ee 6 alli Fre ER es od beh a en DENICE sc 8 os dt hs th ha ok Wh OR Se oh ch a ck oe Pll e p Se g o a ee a RS232 427 485 s amp h A Shih hed ech Hee Ae Ge Sem FNS we a ae y Gc eee aa E 9 te bs pie et is a MACHINE 2 MACHINE 2 An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the imager Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating device
302. o the Message indicator will be flashing GREEN RED Steady GREEN Connected Router the network status indicator will Per requirement be steady GREEN Connection If one or more of the connections in timeout which the device is the target has timed FASNNg RED out the network status indicator will be Per requirement flashing RED If the device has detected that its IP Steady RED Duplicate IP address is already in use the network Not implemented status indicator will be steady RED l While the device is performing its TE GREEN Self test power up testing the module status Per requirement QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 99 Allen Bradley PLC Setup Appendix J Allen Bradley PLC Setup Allen Bradley PLC Setup This section was created and run on the following Allen Bradley Rockwell components e RSLogix 5000 Version 16 e ControlLogix 5561 processor e 756 ENBT A EtherNet IP interface card firmware version 4 003 or newer This setup procedure was also followed in RSLogix with a CompactLogix 5332E as the processor though the final program was not tested with a CompactLogix processor 1 Create the I O Configuration for the base system including the system s Ethernet interface f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit Yiew Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help asul a sae ol ele i vi eel Offline J E RUN H Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 233 Backpla
303. o the Source Port on a good read without Preamble or Postamble in Point to Point protocol even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host Destination Port data always echoes to the Source Port even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode Scanner External Data System Data Destination Data Ambles needed Preamble needed O QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 31 Communication Half Duplex Mode When Half Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Enabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation Source Port data is not echoed back to itself Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received Source Port data is sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble Symbol data is sent to the Source Port and the Destination Port at the same time and conforms to the communication parameters Destination Port data is echoed to the Source
304. ode Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 63 Serial Commands EZ Button Modes QX Hawk C Mount Serial Cmd lt K771 first beep second beep third beep fourth beep gt Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Mode Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 1 No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes per Trigger Trigger Evaluation Period Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analys
305. ollowing measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class II and rated 10 to 28 VDC at 5 watts or greater U S models must use a similarly rated Class or Class I power supply that is certified to comply with standards for safety IEC 60950 1 Ed 2 2005 and IEC 60825 1 Ed 2 2007 European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 1 2006 with Am 11 2009 Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser or LED light radiation exposure There are no user serviceable parts in the imager Opening the imager voids the Microscan systems Inc warranty Warning Label Placement This warning label is located on the QX Hawk Industrial Imager CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Complies with 21 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated June 24 2007 C A vi QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Introduction Statement of Agency Compliance FC The QX Hawk has been tested for compliance with FCC Fed
306. on Firmware Update Firmware Update is used to download application code to the imager Application code versions are specific to the imager Consult with a sales representative before downloading application code If needed application code can be requested from Microscan To download application code 1 First be sure that the imager is connected to the host computer 2 Apply power to the imager 3 In the Firmware Update dropdown menu select App Code This will open a dialog that allows the user to browse for the application code file 4 Navigate to where the application code file is located on the host computer 5 Allow approximately a minute for firmware to download As the application code begins to download the imager will be silent the LEDs will flash intermittently and a progress indicator at the bottom of the ESP window will show when the download is complete Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 17 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number Send a request to the imager for application code boot code DSP code or kernel code part numbers 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code Boot Code DSP Code or Kernel Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Part No button 3 Click the Request Part No button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the r
307. on Leading Edge on 004s Seconds Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 47 Read Cycle Trailing Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive Note 313 10ms Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 0 010045 Seconds Trailing Edge External Trigger State Active Closed External Trigger State Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the imager Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed Active Closed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 48 Parameters Serial Trigger Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host
308. on Printable Characters When Show Non Printable Characters is enabled characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings mese up the Function Keys dialog In this dialog select the EEE EAA E desired function key and then enter the macro keystrokes in the associated key map For example to make Ctrl F2 a the keystroke to send a trigger character select F2 then si Ctrl in the Ctrl row enter lt trigger character gt and click OK shou Alt Shift Then whenever the Ctrl F2 keystroke is pressed the mo trigger character will start the read cycle chiles Key F2 ClearKey Clear All Keys Note The F1 key is reserved for opening ESP Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function Change Font Allows the user to modify the font used for decode data received from the imager on the Terminal Change Echo Font Allows the user to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal Enable Echo Allows the user to enter command characters in Terminal Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled data from the imager will continue to appear in the Terminal even when ESP is not the top window QX Hawk Indust
309. ontroller MscanLogix5561 Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller Sele i ba Handler Scope f MscanLogix5561 Show Show All ee ae Handler Aae JLE a T G Maintask ome AB ETHERNET_MODULE C 0 2 MainProgram _ OXHawk Tail AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT _17BByte Program Tags _ 0xHawk 0 esd AB ETHERNET_MODULE_DINT_12Bytes Offline 5 E RUN z Te A Path AB_ETHIP 1410 10 5 233 Backplane 0 v x E unscheduled Progra J Motion Groups 3 Ungrouped Axes Cut Ctrl X Add On Instructions Copy Ctrl C amp Data Types Gi User Defined Strings Delete Del i Add On Defined Oa Predefined verify E Module Defined Cross Reference Ctrl E Trends I O Configuration Browse Logic Ctrl L J 1756 Backplane 17 fa 0 1756 L61 me Print 3 1756 ENBT H a Ethernet Properties 4lt Enter f 1756 ENBTA EIp ETHERNET MODULE QxXHawk no Monitor Tags AEdit Tags 7 4 Paste Ctrl Ladder Diagram Main Open the selected component or collection QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 9 Right click on the top rung and select Import Rung f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 Appendices File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsa S selel ol shll GIR alal Offline No Forces b ae No Edits as Evo Redundancy 50 D J E RUN E fd P
310. ood read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Duration value E Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting laars On Green Flash Duration 1 000 Seconds Beeper agod Read LED Configuration ISOVIEC 1602 Grade Final Grade 5 104 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Beeper An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times e When the imager is defaulted e When a Send and Save command is sent from ESP e At the conclusion of an Auto Calibration procedure e When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent from ESP s Terminal E Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Always On Green Flash Duration 100 Good Read v Disabled G oo d F FA d x NoRead y O LED Configuration ISO IEC 1602 Grade QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 105 I O Parameters LED Configuration When the Symbol Grade Standard is set to ISO IEC 16022 grade and the Bar Graph is configured for Grading this parameter determines which ISO IEC 16022 grade to display on the LED bar graph Using the read rate scale as reference if the ISO IEC 16022 grade result was a grade A all the LEDs from 20 to 100 would be illuminated If the result was a grade F only the
311. or initial setup of a QX Hawk in a network This parameter controls whether or not the QX Hawk will respond to ESP s Search function in the Ethernet TCP IP connect dialog section of the Connection Wizard TCP IP IP Address 10 10 4 46 O RS 232 Ethernet TCP Fort 1 2001 z Connect to Fort 1 TCP Port 2 2003 Connect to Port 2 Subnet 255 55 254 OD Gateway 10 10 4 1 IF Address Mode DHCP Static After the QX Hawk is in full use in an application you may want the Heme IF Address MAC ID imager to continue to appear in OXHAWK 10 10 4132 00 0B 43 0F 6B 68 the Search response list for future searches This can help prevent disruption of the system that may occur is ESP were to show only unconfigured units Connect Cancel Changes to this parameter are saved to NOVRAM and are set to default on power on A Reset lt A gt is required for settings to take effect Important Once this setting is Disabled ESP will only be able to connect to the imager if you know the IP address and enter it in the IP Address field of the Ethernet TCP IP connect dialog Search and Configure Mode can be re enabled by defaulting the QX Hawk Enabled When enabled Search and Configure Mode will find the imager and settings can be changed Timed Window When Timed Window is selected Search and Configure Mode will find the imager and settings can be changed but only 60 seconds fro
312. ore is the maximum Number of Captures the current setting for number of captures If the user is operating in a continuous capture mode then they can store up to the maximum number of captures 3 Image Storage Type Disabled Clear Upon selection all saved images will be cleared and the unit will not store images for later retrieving Store on No Read The unit will store an image upon exiting the read cycle that retrieved a later time If multiple captures are present during the duration of a read cycle the image stored will be the last image processed for the read cycle This image is stored in RAM and can be retrieved as long as power is applied and the unit has not been reset via reset save sequences Other commands that can initialize the storage RAM are ones that changed capture modes or put the unit in a test capture mode E Store Mo Read Image Image Storage Type Disabled Image Storage Mode Disabled Store on Mo Read Image Storage Mode First Image In this mode the image storage will store images until the available image memory has been filled At this point the unit will stop saving additional images In this mode you will always have the first images that were stored Last Image In this mode the image storage will continue to store images after the available memory has been filled by purging the oldest image in the storage memory In this mode you will always have the last images that were stor
313. ory Bracket R 100 to QX Hawk Accessory Bracket R 60 70 to QX Hawk Accessory Bracket R 100 to C MOUNT QX Hawk Accessory Bracket R 60 70 to C MOUNT QX Hawk 5MM Extension Tube for C Mount Lenses Lens Extension Tube Set 0 5 1 5 10 20 40mm Lens 8mm F 1 4 16 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens 12mm F 1 8 16 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens 16mm F 1 4 16 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens 25mm F 1 6 16 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens 35mm F 2 1 22 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens 50mm F 2 8 22 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens 75mm F 3 9 32 FT 25 5mm P 0 5mm 2 3 C MNT Lens Skylight UV Filter 25 5mm Thread Polarizing Filter 25 5mm Thread Lens Protection Housing Standard Length up to 48mm QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 9 General Specifications 98 000226 01 Lens Protection Housing Long up to 72mm Object Detectors 99 000020 01 Photo Sensor M12 4pin Plug NPN Dark Off 2m 99 000020 02 Photo Sensor M12 4 pin Plug NPN Dark On 2 m 98 000149 01 Demo Kit QX Hawk Documentation 37 000010 01 Microscan Tools Drive Software User s Manuals Quick Start Guides Configuration Guides links to other documents on Microscan website A 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix B Electrical Specifications Standard QX Hawk CMOS Power Requirement 5 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripp
314. ounter to 000000000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers that have occurred since power on or the last Trigger Counter Reset command A lt T OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt T gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example f the counter is at 999999998 and 3 additional counts have been captured then lt T ERROR gt will be output and the next lt T gt command without any new triggers will return lt T 000000002 gt Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the Trigger Counter to 000000000 Good Read Match Counter Sending lt V gt displays either 1 the total number of decodes that match the master symbol or 2 the total number of good reads The count begins from the last power on or Good Read Match Counter Reset command To count the good reads that match the master symbol enable Matchcode To count good reads only disable Matchcode This counter is always active and can be requested at any time A lt V OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt V gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example lf the counter is at 999999997 and 3 additional counts have been captured then lt V E
315. p x os j cafa g f DIG alsa a slae alsel le v ael Rem Run AE E Run Mode Path AB_ETHIP 1 10 10 5 233 Backplane O v j5 paa gt IB Controller OK E Battery OK No Edis Sn u E EE gt i By on Fey CT Cy Ma A J Controller MscanLogix5561 Scope Eg MainProgam v _ Show Showan Controller Tags TR y amp ele a E Controller Fault Handler H Name i Value Style Data Type Description Power Up Handler OXHawk_IO_big_pt eet if QXHawk_IO_big_udt amp Tasks _ OXHawk_IO_big_pt IN K OXHawk_IN_big_udt choose one CPS for IN and OUT _sm fa MainTask _ OXHawk_IO_big_pt IN OUT_echo Tang QXHawk_OUT_udt E MainProgram QXHawk_IO_big_ptIN OUT_echo userta EEE Decima DINT 5 _l0_big p 3 g Proen lans QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN QUT_echo command TESNA QXHawk_command ERI MainRoutine E Unscheduled Programs 0xHawk_I0_big_pt IN 0UT_echo ext_out Tasa Nii QXHawk_external_outputs J Motion Groups _ QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN ext_in flooalh fl OXHawk_extermal_inputs E Ungrouped Axes _ OXHawk_IO_big_pt IN ext_out Taw fi QXHawk_external_outputs E Add On Instructions _ OXHawk_IO_big_ptiN device_status TENI OXHawk_device_status Data Types QXHawk_I0_big_ptiN sequence 3 Decimal DINT SR User Defined QXHawk_I0_big_ptIN trigger_cnt 3 Decimal DINT E QxHawk_command awk_ O_big_pt IN trigger_cni ecimal Ig OxHawk device_status E 0XHawk_I0_big_ptIN decode_match_ent 3 Decimal DINT BA QxXHawk_
316. p the lower portion of the Utilities view button during an active Read Rate test Serial commands can also be sent to the imager from this screen QX Hawk C Mount 1 QX Hawk C Mount BONARE Point to Point Important When Read Rate is enabled the Configuration Database is not active regardless of how the imager is configured 7 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Read Rate Serial Utility Commands Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the imager to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the imager during setup Enter Decode Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the imager to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data End Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests Sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 5 Counters Counters i Click the Utilities button and then the Counters tab to Utilities display the Counters view Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the
317. p 6 Connect Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on the menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure settings as required by the application and click Connect 4 IP Address 162 148 88 51 4 TCP Port 2001 4 4 4 4 RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible SON Point to Point COM1 115 2K N 8 1_ Important The imager is in Continuous Read Mode by default For best connection results be sure that no decodable symbols are within the imager s field of view while attempting to connect 1 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 6 Connect cont Ethernet TCP IP Once the QX Hawk is connected incoming symbol data can be displayed in the Terminal as shown below 25 ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Ez G t zh Y aj L Ogle 2 Er Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal P A H Find Send NextRow Read Ratedecode sec Read Rate percent End Read Rate Target Pattern n press Fl QX Hawk 1 QX Hawk EEM For Help 1 11 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Locate Symbol Step 7 Locate Symbol Lo
318. part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Start and Stop Output Status Enabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 75 Symbologies Large Intercharacter Gap When disabled the spaces between characters or the intercharacter gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the imager will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Symbol Length This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Symbol Length 1 64 Check Character Type When disabled the imager will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the imager will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW 7 the imager will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded Whe
319. pe Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Sequence on Mismatch Mew Master Pin Disabled Enabled Disabled Sequence Step Enabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequence on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequence on No Read 006 No Read 007 sequence on No Read 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 171 Matchcode Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode Type must be set to Sequential for this command to function Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur The imager will sequ
320. ply F lt m HU To Power E 7 QX 1 Multidrop E u Supply Concentrator Host or PLC QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 9 Port Routing Port Routing The physical advantages created by flexible signal routing and switching are enhanced further by Port Routing which can be configured in ESP Port Routing eliminates the need for dedicated Host and Aux ports in a traditional sense With Port Routing any port can be defined as a Host or Aux port Port Routing also allows users to define the data types that are accessible from specific ports The primary benefit of Port Routing is that any type of data can be routed to any port and can be sent through multiple ports simultaneously Multiple types of data can also be appended to the symbol data that is output from the imager to the host Command data symbol data extra symbol information and diagnostic data are enabled by default in the QX Hawk The table below lists different types of data with examples for each data type Data Type Example Command Data Serial commands imager responses to serial commands Symbol Data Any string of data encoded in a symbol Extra Symbol Information Decodes per trigger decode direction configuration database index number Diagnostic Data Service message The screen capture below from ESP shows the QX Hawk s four communications ports and the parameters for each Stop Bits D
321. present image If successful the Good Read indicator on the WOI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below Note You can resize the image by clicking and dragging the ESP window from the lower right corner This is useful where very small symbols are being read 2 Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading Notice that the surrounding area goes black You can use the handles on the image area that you have just drawn to resize the region of interest You can also click on the center of the window of interest and move it 3 Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode Window of Interest Top Height Contrast Left width Window of Interest a Let 0 Width Note To remove the window of interest click the Reset button or click anywhere in the WOI pane Note that all pixels not in the WOI are defined as black Because the imager has far less processing to do in a smaller window read rates typically increase dramatically One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window Always verify that your WOI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your field of view QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 23 Configuration Database Configuration Database The Configuration Database allows the user to manage multiple configuration profiles It is a useful tool
322. put When set to Disabled the Input pin has no impact on operation Disabled Reset Counts When set to Reset Counts a transition to the active state of the Input will cause the imager to reset the internal counters Unlatch Output This setting is used in combination with any of the three outputs in Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were previously latched Active State Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Actve Open Active Closed Active Open Input function is activated when input state is de energized Active Closed Input function is activated when input state is energized QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 127 I O Parameters Output 1 Parameters Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory B Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read wt Output State Mismatch or No Read Pulse width Match or Good Read
323. put Status Disabled Symbol Length 1 10 Symbol Length 2 6 Guard Bar Disabled Range Mode Status Disabled Check Character Status This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check character verification An error correcting routine in which the check character character is added Check Character Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Check Character Output Status When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled 5 72 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Length 1 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 1 0 64 Symbol Length 2 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two f
324. put on Axial Non Uniformity The axial non uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled al izabled Enabled Output On Unused ECC The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value tI cu EE T a 4 Gutpuet on Unused ECC izabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 135 I O Parameters Symbol Contrast Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade L w Print Growth Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Print Growth grade is under the threshold Print Growth Threshold Grade C w Axial Non Uniformity Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Axial Non Uniformity grade is under the threshold Axial Mon uniformiky Threshold Unused ECC Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Unused ECC grade is under the threshold Barade C ka Unused ECC Threshold 5 136 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 1 Para
325. quently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 unlike RS 232 measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be up to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground It can be used wherever RS 232 is used Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP TCP IP and EtherNet IP protocols are supported over Ethernet A 6 byte hardware address is used which is divided into a 3 byte vendor ID and a 3 byte vendor defined field Ethernet enabled device manufacturers are assigned a unique vendor ID and are then responsible for insuring that all of their devices have unique addresses in the last 3 bytes QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 121 Glossary of Terms Appendix L Glossary of Terms Aberration The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point to point correspondence between the object and its resulting image Various types are chromatic spherical coma astigmatism and distortion Absorption The loss of light of certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy Active Illumination Lighting an area with a light source coordinated with the acquisition of an image St
326. r s Manual Appendices Appendix E Serial Commands Note For a list of utility commands such as defaults read rate requests device control options and imager status requests see Serial Utility Commands Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Search and Configure Mode lt K128 ESP Search and Configure Mode gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 respo
327. r All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWYZ201 23456789 oa Multiple character sequences can be extracted and inserted using Symbol Parse In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 39 Output Format Insert Symbol Parse Step Insert Data Extract Range Insert S0H sTx ETX E0T ENG ACK BEL Bs HT LF mae eT si pet Dc2 Dea Deal Nak SYN ETB Can Em sue Esc Fs 63 AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Add Insert Step Add Extract Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCOEFGHWELMINOPOR STU wey201 23456 759 Output The Insert process is very similar to the Extract process except that Insert allows the user to enter characters using the Insert calculator shown above Parse Symbols Send and Save Y Hide Parse Table Symbol Parse Build Sequence Step Insert Data Extract Hange Inzert SF SP Extract 3 5 Step Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Ta
328. r Expanded RSS Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 56 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 14 Options 1 to 74 MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Options 1 to 366 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 5 Serial Commands Camera Setup Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Focus Distance lt K525 focal distance distance units lens type gt Illumination Standard QX Hawk Only lt K539 mode brightness gt Camera Settings lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Sub Sampling lt K542 sub sampling gt Morpho
329. r of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 45 Read Cycle External Level Initiate Read Cycle gt lt q Object 1 moving in front of the K o seri Causes a change in the trigger state Object ND which initiates the read cycle End Read Cycle gt The same object moving out of Object i3 the detector beam causes detector another change in the trigger o state which ends the read cycle This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the imager spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred External Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Initiate Read Cycle j 7 a Object 1 moving in front of the
330. r symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container With Mismatch enabled the imager transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Good Read Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified With Good Read enabled the imager transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled 5 98 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters When to Output Symbol Data This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host Symbol Data Output When bo Output Symbol Data As Soon 42 Possible Ss Soon 42 Possible End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbo
331. raa lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value background gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar Omnidirectional lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed length status fixed symbol length gt Composite Symbology Status Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled Separator Status Composite 1 Enabled 2 Required Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled A 46 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Separator Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabl
332. rea OUT A 118 Rs EIPScan ElPscan gxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request I O Stack Device IO Module Help D S W Target ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 s Adapter 10 10 4 130 X Request all fields are in hex Host 10 10 4 130 Predefined None X QX HAWK Connection Instance 1 RPIs 20 20 Cyclic EA Service hex fe Class hex 4 G 5 14 13 121109876543210 Instance hex 301 Attribute hex 3 10 105 234 ccceccececececE Member hex Symbol Tag Request Data Each byte is a 2 char hex value separated by a space i e Da 26 f9 ns Response Response Size decimal 260 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO 01 00 0O 00 01 00 00 O00 01 00 00 OO OO OO OO 00 00 00 00 00 Oc 00 OO 00 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 00 00 00 O00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 OO OO 0O OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO a 12 13 50 983 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 11 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rey API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 12 16 15 33 Connection closed
333. rences Master Database Firmware Master Symbol Database Size Matchoode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 z Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Saves the database to Master Symbol Data the i e imager Master Symbol 1 g Master Symbol 2 Loads the imager s saved Master Symbol 3 master symbols into ESP Master Symbol 4 y i Master Symbol 5 Double click a row to enter data into popup text box Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database i limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will r allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master spmbols to be deleted See manual for details QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 11 Master Database Master Symbol Database Size Master Symbol Database Size allows the user to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type 5 B 5 g Receive Reader s Database send Database to Reader Read Symbol into Selected Index Set Master Symbol Database Size here Important Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except
334. returns lt d 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt k gt a request for the kernel code build number is sent the imager returns lt k 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt p gt a request for the system configuration file build number is sent the imager returns lt p 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt 7 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Bar Code Configuration Mode Definition Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the imager by using ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt BCCFG gt Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered three different ways 1 By forcing the imager into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the 4 EZ Button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode 3 By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special code word used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming This can be either in a regular read cycle or during a read rate test Reading this symbol in the calibration routine will have no effect Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data You can configure the imager by printing labels in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The imager will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial data to the host If the command causes the imager to produce more serial outpu
335. rial and triggered Read cycle reports are not output during bar code configuration read rate auto calibration or ESP Setup mode Read Cycle Report Trigger Decode Match Mismatch No Read Count These are the historical read cycle result counters By comparing the values to a previous report the number of decodes mismatches and noreads in the current read cycle can be determined Read Cycle Report Decode Data This string has the same format that would be output a serial port or tcp connection with one difference preamble and postamble are not added QX Hawk OUT Assembly 0xC6 198 decimal Command OUT PLC gt QX Hawk Size of Data A Field Data Type Type Elements Field Name 0 U32 1 User Defined Tag U32 32 bit flags omen U32 2 32 bit flags 1 External Output Control User Defined Tag This provides the PLC programmer a method of uniquely identifying multiple readers in the system This field serves no functional purpose in the QX Hawk The value sent by the PLC for this field is echoed back to the input assemblies QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 95 Using EtherNet IP Command Bit Action 0O Trigger 1 New Master 2 7 8 Disable Scanning 9 15 Reserved 16 Clear Read Cycle Report and Counters 17 Unlatch Outputs 18 31 Reserved The PLC programmer should verify that a Command has been received by QX Hawk by observing the equivalent echo field in t
336. rial Imager User s Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Bar Code Options Tab Preferences Bar Width 18 Mils ES Example Sizing Information Sets the bar height in inches and bar width in mils or thousandths of an inch of user created symbols Example A bar width of 18 mils is 0 018 inches 2 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Advanced Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Sync When entering a view that supports Auto Sync do the following v Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs Receive Settings from the Reader Send ESP Settings to the Reader Do Not Send or Receive Settings 4 Show Target Pattem During Locate Send XON with Autoconnect Show Target Pattem During Calibrate V Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting Use Higher Quality Images Connect to readers via TCP IP Open Image after Save v Use Default Storage Location Ok Cancel The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow the user to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If this option box is checked specific Auto Sync functions can be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the imager s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader w
337. rigger N RS 232 Host RxD 2 Power 0 RS 232 Host TxD A All Models M12 12 pin Plug Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Default Green 4 New Master Yellow 5 Output 1 Gray 6 Output 3 Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 RS 232 Host RxD Black 10 RS 232 Host TxD Violet 11 Output 2 Gray Pink 12 Output Common Red Blue Continued next page 3 4 A is a serial M12 12 pin plug It is the same for all models of the QX Hawk B is a serial M12 12 pin socket for serial models and an Ethernet M12 8 pin socket for Ethernet models QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts continued RS T RxD Input 9 RS 232 TxD Common 8 RS 232 RTS 1 Trigger Ground a PEVA S RS 232 RxD RS 422 485 i Au RxD se n k RS 232 CTS Y z A gt ae on 2 Power RS 422 485 5 TxD Input 1 4 1 3 Terminated RS 422 485 TxD B Serial Models M12 12 pin Socket Pin Function Wire Color 1 Trigger White 2 Power Brown 3 Terminated Green 4 Input 1 Yellow 5 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray 6 Port 3 422 485 RxD Pink 7 Ground Blue 8 Input Common Red 9 Port 2 TxD Port 1 RTS Black 10 Port 2 RxD Port 1 CTS Violet 11 Port 3 422 485 TxD Gray Pink 12 Port 3 422 485 RxD Red Blue QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Ma
338. rigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 142 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 0 255 Number to Output On T Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Gukput Cr D 0 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX Hawk Industrial Ima
339. rminal emulation or serial communication tool that can connect to a TCP socket such as HyperTerminal e ESP Microscan s Easy Setup Program This tool has the ability to find Microscan products on the network configure their ip address then configure all application parameters EtherNet IP Terms of Use EtherNet IP Technology is governed by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA Any person or entity that makes and sells products that implement EtherNet IP Technology must agree to the Terms of Usage Agreement issued by ODVA See www odva org for details Device Type The EtherNet IP device type is 0x00 Generic Device Vendor ID Microscan s Vendor ID is 1095 Product Code The Product Code is 6800 QX Hawk EtherNet IP Object Model QX Hawk uses Class 1 connected messaging to communicate most data in three different io assemblies The user chooses one of two input assemblies plus the output assembly to create a Class 1 connection Connection properties supported Class 1 Trigger Mode Cyclic and Change of State Cyclic Rate Greater than 20 ms recommended 10 ms minimum Size Fixed Type Point to Point PLC OUT O gt T Point to Point and Multicast PLC IN T gt O Priority Low High and Scheduled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 91 Using EtherNet IP Data Types Microscan Data Type AB PLC ODVA CIP EDS Description U8 SINT USINT Unsigned 8 bit U32 DINT U
340. robed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples ADC See Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter See Analog to Digital Converter AGC See Automatic Gain Control Ambient Light Light which is present in the environment of the imaging front end of a vision system and generated from outside sources This light unless used for actual illumination will be treated as background Noise by the vision system Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter or ADC A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers signal for computer processing Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC An integrated circuit that is customized for a particular kind of use rather than general use All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated into one ASIC Architecture The hardware organization of a vision system designed for high speed image analysis ASIC See Application Specific Integrated Circuit Aspect Ratio The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display Found by dividing the vertical number of pixels height by the horizontal number of pixels width leaving it in fractional format Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance betw
341. rocessing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Hone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits 5 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Symbol Data Output E nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager Diagnostics Output Enabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 9 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from source
342. rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the imager does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is cycled or if the imager receives a Reset or Save command Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Clear All Trigger Good Read No Read and Mismatch counters can be requested and cleared simultaneously Request Te All and Clear All buttons Voger or individually Request and Clear buttons to the Good Fead o left of each item NoRed e Vien 7 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Counters Serial Utility Commands No Read Counter sending lt N gt displays the total number of no reads that have occurred since power on or the last No Read Counter Reset command A lt N OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt N gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example lf the counter is at 999999999 and 3 additional counts have been captured then lt N ERROR gt will be output and the next lt N gt command without any new no reads will return lt N 000000003 gt No Read Counter Reset sending lt O gt sets the No Read C
343. rs Copy selected text to clipboard Paste from Terminal or other text Clear all text in Terminal window Select All text in the Terminal window Save brings up a Save As dialog Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog aE Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font ialog Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Change Background Color of Terminal window Non Printable Characters allows the user to hide non printable characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format e Default Settings returns all the above settings to default Default Settings keyboard Macros Keyboard Macros allows the user to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defined above Terminal Capture Text Save Current Text Change Font Change Echo Font Disable Echo Change Background Color Mon Printable Characters Default Settings Find Nex F3 e Capture Text allows the user to append data in real time to a text file While in operation the text file cannot be opened Pause interrupts the capture flow and Stop ends the flow and opens the file e Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal window to a text file e Find Next searches for a user defined
344. ry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example to enter the three character sequence Hi 3 would indicate the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 would be the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since there is a limit of 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry there is a limit of 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NULL 0x00 Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs A 72 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Format Assign Symbol Number Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol Output Format Status Serial Cmd lt K743 output format status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length
345. s Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Diagnostics section of Appendix E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 175 Diagnostics Hours Since Reset Read only Used as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a reset Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last system reset Hours Since Reset Read only Hours T Minutes T Hours 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Range 0 to 23 hours Minutes 16 bit counter that increments every 60 seconds Range 0 to 59 minutes 5 176 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Service Message Status When Enabled a Service Message of up to 128 characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service time has expired Service Message Status Disabled Service Message Disabled Threshold Enabled Resolution Seconds Service Message Allows the user to define a service message of up to 128 characters Service Message Status Disahled Service Messa SERVI CE Threshold UU Resolution Seconds Threshold Allows the user to determine the length of time until the service message will be sent Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 1 65535 Resolution Seconds Resolution The service timer has a resolution field for setting up the
346. s Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Hardware cccccccccseecccceeeeeceseeeceeeeseseeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeees 1 2 Step 2 Connect the SySteM ccccccssscecccesseeececeeeeesseeseeessaseeeeseaeeees 1 4 Step 3 Position the IMAGE cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesneeees 1 6 Step 4 Install ESP ccc cccccecsseeeccsseecesseecesseeeccaeeesessaecesseeseaseeseaseeens 1 7 Step 5 Select Model 0 0 0 ceeccccecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeseeeeseeeesseeeeees 1 8 Step 0 CONNEC osie e Aa Ea nTa 1 10 Step 7 Locate Symbol cccccccsseccccccsssececceseeececeeeeecseeueeeesseseeeesseaees 1 12 Step OC AID IANS a is iinis iirinn irei nicaieri irii iraani nii 1 14 Step 9 Test Read Rate tiensscsewsstecesedaccncasaetasiccaneitadedaaseatieiacaneesasedeeedes 1 15 Step 10 Configure the Imager ccccceceeccssseeeecceeseeecseeeeeeeeseaeeeeessuees 1 16 Step 11 Save CHANGES cccccccccsseceecceeeccecceegseessesseeeseuseeeesseneeeeeseas 1 17 Chapter 2 Using ESP EZ WO CS isis codes esis coc triesda NAN 2 2 ADP MOG G insna net ee eee ea eR een eee eee 2 3 Menu TOODA a sec setecis ie eee a a a aA aE Geeta 2 4 Navigating IM ESP checdicdcc iera i a a a a eet 2 15 SeNG RECCIVE OPUONS sissors a a aaa a a a 2 16 Chapter 3 Hardware Integration 0 01a 216 3 a aaee E EE 3 2 COS CUS hice tices cists telecine opel a E ee daateemeee 3 3 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and PinOuts c
347. s can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host imager and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering POWER 3 TERMINAL POWER RETURN POWER S EARTH SUPPLY SF Shunt Filtering POWER GHD POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER RETURH SUPPLY EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel CHASSIS GHD COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE fen A MOUNTING BRACKET Grounding Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the imager e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 7 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts QX 1 Interface Device The QX 1 Interface Device s receptacles are physically the same as those on the QX Hawk but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 allows users to bus po
348. s 150917 12 13 31 755 Error Request failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request Failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection Failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 5535 Sent pkts 7012 Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 18 20 45 53R Cannertinn rinsed with Instance 1 v 1 Class1 connections active Max Recv Delay 102 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Max Recy API 25 35 Max Send API 20 01 A 120 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix K Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the QX Hawk selection of interface is made by pin assignment and in the case of host communication by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the imager and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used fre
349. s baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Search and Configure Mode lt K128 ESP Search and Configure Mode gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbo data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode dest
350. s been received by QX Hawk External Input Status Physical Pin State Bit Pin Name 0 Trigger 1 New Master 2 31 Reserved O no current sensed on input 1 current sensed on input External Output Status Physical Pin State Bit Pin Name 0 Out 1 2 Out2 Out3 3 31 Reserved 0 output contact is open 1 output contact is closed Device Status Field Bit Name State 0 Reserved 1 Lea 1 New Master Requested 2 Reserved 8 Scanning Disabled 1 Scanning Disabled 9 15 Reserved 16 iln Read Cycle 1 In Read Cycle 17 Actively Scanning 1 Active Scanning A 94 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Note the following details with In Read Cycle and Actively Scanning signals 1 They may be very short lived It is possible for the reader to begin and end a read cycle without these signals being seen in active state 2 They are only valid for normal read cycle operation continuous serial and triggered They do not reflect operation during bar code configuration read rate auto calibration or ESP Setup mode Read Cycle Sequence Counter When this value changes it indicates a new read cycle report is present Read cycle report data is only valid when Sequence is not 0 Read cycle reports are only output during normal read cycles continuous se
351. s external to the imager External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables RS 232 B as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters RS 422 The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 422 formatting R5422 Disabled Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Biks One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Gukput Disabled Extra Symbol Information Disabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Disabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits QX Hawk Industrial I
352. s to be processed to setup the new configuration prior to capturing an image The capture will start immediately following the integration period If the image dimensions are configured as a Region of Interest ROI then a change to these values does not incur the additional image frame since it is no longer a camera setting Since some image capture events require that an image frame delay occur and some don t this does complicate the image capture time when the Configuration Database is enabled Notes e If no camera change occurs the start of the image capture is immediate upon being triggered e If a camera change occurs the start of the image capture occurs after the shutter time has completed In the case above the image capture would incur a 1ms delay Number of Active Indexes Number of database records groups of settings that will be used automatically during the read cycle If set to 0 the imager only uses the current settings not database entry settings Sort Database Activates a sort function that move the database entry associated with the last decode to the first position in the database and move all other entries up 4 30 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Database Mode Switch Mode Selects the event that causes the imager to load the next entry from the database to current active settings When timer count expires and Image Process Looping is enabled the next database entry that has
353. sage Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Threshold Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes User Defined Name Serial Cmd lt K412 user defined name gt Default QX Hawk Options Any valid ASCII string up to 50 characters A 70 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder CHI PH bre ounonreen data unused database index gt Output Filter Enable lt K745 number of filters gt Format Extract Output Index Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Options 1 to 100 Start Location Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Length Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to n maximum numb
354. screw down connectors Ultra Lock is a trademark of Woodhead Molex 3 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Cordsets The terms cordset and cable are both applicable to industrial connectivity but they are not synonymous Cordsets enable communications and power between imagers and interface devices Cordsets have an M12 Ultra Lock connector at one or both ends Examples of cordsets are shown below M12 Ultra Lock to Photo Sensor Cordset Cables do not have M12 Ultra Lock connectors at either end An example of a cable is shown below Cable with flying leads QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 3 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts When deploying a network of imagers and interface devices in an industrial setting it is important to use components whose pin assignments are arranged in a way that avoids communication errors and equipment damage This can be achieved with components that are designed in a logical consistent and easy to implement way The QX Hawk has a very simple pin assignment methodology The clearly identified connectors at the back of the unit can be used to receive and bus power and also to send and receive data and commands QX Hawk Connectors New Master Output 1 sey Ground 7 Input Common Output 2 ii fi Default Output rae H fi 1 Output 3 6 A aan ae T
355. section of text in the Terminal e Find Previous operates in the same way as Find d Next but searches backward through Terminal text Find Previous ShiFE F3 Keyboard Macros QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E Utilities Contents Serial Utility COMMANAS ceccccceseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeessaeeeesseeeeeeeaseeseeessageeeees 1 2 Read TM ec a ie ss esse see cs eee ea ne ae eee a ntti 1 4 COUOT S seeen as ein eda ng a E a ete e 7 6 DVICE 91 110 orei nC TS TS EP eT ONC Ore ae en eT ee ear ere eee 1 9 Differences from DOTAUN Eric criccctdcadanassatad ddndaantnavcctaecs sed ciessiedeadectdpacaieadacwnssdsasvenesseeceadagoesxeacued es 7 10 VERIGI BF 6 6 cc ne re ea ee a ae Pe 1 11 Pr VEN AN cdc acne eee sare ere sein a eas PE E E cca ge oa E A ead ees 1 17 Bar Code Configuration Mode vivresesesisteecdescnnssotertecscdsceleccsseaiendensndubnsgecuncused uted odsvedseedesentiteasneneteds 7 21 CANDEA UO een eam me re ee ne ee e E ee ee eee 1 22 Sra Sy Secrets cect seit asec tance eect aaa ada T uaria A Erihana 1 23 EIGN RYE AN Sets carci sett E beacuse tases deat no acseoedenc O A A 7 25 Leanni Opera UON creases asec src scct aces a e teeta ec ative ten aoc ceseuence end atene a eeGandsentoenen aac 7 27 Rapor yS oean a E eee ee ne ee ee ee ee ee eee nee ee ere 7 28 Statie ValdatiO ess sce esate hee a ai EE EE ade dead Ean E a 1 29 Ve SUING oe E A TE ceiaided nininemsncnecaddaceia 1 31
356. ser E Reload Last File Show Both Icon and Text to determine how ESP F Show Model Prompt Only Show Icon will display the mode options in the two rows at the top of the screen E Show Connect Prompt D Only Show Teg E Receive After Connect E Skip EZ Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported readers Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect to the QX Hawk prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the imager s settings into ESP This is not recommended if ESP settings are needed for future use Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Terminal Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced V Show Non Printable Characters Default Format Fast Enhanced Format Slower Change Echo Fort Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Blue Background Color 7 Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Show N
357. st Input Host Camera H Output 1 E T Input gt T gt Input T gt Input QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 15 Electrical Specifications PNP Output for External Load Camera A 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Optoisolated Inputs All discrete inputs are optoisolated Inputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system because the input common is shared by all inputs NPN NPN Source Camera CLC Current Limiting Circuit QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 17 Electrical Specifications PNP Source PNP Camera CLC i a Input Common CLC Current Limiting Circuit A 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Output Wiring M12 12 pin plug flying lead cordset Output 1 Pin 5 Output Pin 11 Output 3 Pin 6 24V Pin Input Common Pin amp New Master Pin 4 Output Common Pin 12 Ground Pin 7 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Terminal Strip Light Stack Gray Red Beacon Gray Pink _ _ Amber Beacon Pink 8 Green Beacon 24V Red Yellow __ Normally Open Mome ntary Push Button Blue New Master Blue A 19 Ground and Shield Considerations Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection o
358. st is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings Host gt ost Imager If a command with multiple fields is processed some of the lt fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Qubpuk Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Causes the imager to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed If an invalid command is entered the imager beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ContralfHex Output Tene Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 107 I O Parameters Control Hex Output Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For e
359. st requirements our ROoHS compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca BDE Perfluorooctanes PFOS or Perfluorooctanoic Acid PFOA compounds above the maximum trace levels To view the documents stating these requirements please visit http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri CELEX 32002L0095 EN HTML and http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2006 372 0032 0034 EN PDF Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of Microscan s ROHS Compliant products This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which Microscan believes to be reliable and from random sample testing however the information is provided without any representation of warranty expressed or implied regarding accuracy or correctness Microscan does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or end product to measure for these substances The information provided in this certification notice is correct to the best of Microscan s knowledge at the date of publication This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any ROHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product viii QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 Check Hardware cccccscccccssccccseeceeeseceeseeceeseeceeseeeeeseueeeseuececeegeesseeessecesseueeesegeess
360. string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples e Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 e Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 e Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 12340 e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1234A or 123BATS e Filter data 12 This will match 1234 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 1234C 4 34 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Ordered Output Filter Settings Ordered Output Filter Settings Setup Filter 1 Criteria Symbology Type Any Type z Length E Enter Match String Matching String i ASCII Lookup CR Add to Match String Match Sting Detinables Wildcard Character Placeholder Character E Database Number Any i Decode Director Either Double clicking on a row in
361. t such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host port Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ Button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the Data Matrix symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a Data Matrix symbol This configures the imager to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 In normal reading modes it is required to read a special Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 21 Calibration Calibration sending the lt CAL gt command from ESP s Terminal initiates auto calibration without entering the auto calibration menu The calibrated parameters are determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command Lens Calibration Important The lt OPTIC gt command should only be used when changing the lens module Important lt OPTIC gt is not supported by the QX Hawk C Mount Imager Sending the lt OPTIC gt command puts the imager into a setup mode for the purpose of improving the accuracy of the focal distance parameter lt
362. t K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Any Direction Options 0 Any Direction 1 Forward 2 Reverse Database Index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 any index Options 0 to 10 Output Filter Enable Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 75 Serial Commands Serial Utility Commands Type Command Name Bar Code Configuration lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration lt CAL gt Calibrate Calibration 7 are lt OPTIC gt Initiate Lens Calibration Standard QX Hawk only lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset Counters lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset lt A gt Software Reset Retain Current Parameters lt Ard gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults lt Arp gt Software Reset Recall Power On Defaults Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults Default Reset Save Software Reset Save Current Settings for Power On Software Reset Save Current Settings as Customer Defaults Software Reset Recall F
363. t OXH awh 10_big_pt IN Hoa dt tt QxHawk_IN_big_udt choose one CPS for IN and OUT _sm 8 7 fa MainTask E HaxHawk 10_big_pt IN OUT_echo eb QxHawk_OUT_udt T echo of OUT nbly bac 38 gt en QXHawk_10_bia_ptIN GUT_echo usertag Ol Decimal DINT hel jer pream Wee QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN QUT_echo command Taint QXHawk_command echo of OUT a b EA MainRoutine TT f 1 Unscheduled Programs H QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN QUT_echo ext_out d OXHawk_external_outputs discrete output control reserved i 3 6 Motion Groups OxHawk_I0_big_pt IN ext_in ORES AE _ GXHawk_extemal_inputs status of discrete inp i Ungrouped Axes OXHawk_IO_big_pt IN ext_out ae OQXHawk_external_outputs tatus of discrete o Add On Instructions es QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN device_status ORES AR QXHawk_device_status choose fo j SE eins ined QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN sequence 3 Decimal DINT je r BH oxtiank hei E QHawk_IO_big_pt IN trigger_cnt 3 Decimal DINT Tii E OXHawk_device status QXHawk_lO_big_pt IN decode_match_cnt 3 Decimal DINT Go a E BE ee E ee tio QXHawk_external_inputs QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN mismatch_cnt O Decimal DINT M Ba QxHawk_ _inp E 0 QXHawk_external_outputs _ QXHawk_IO_big_pt IN noread_cnt 0 Decimal DINT No t 0 QXHawk_IN_big_udt OxHawk_IO_big_pt IN symb_str 123456789012vF000v 0118 str128 bar Bi QkHawk IN small_udt GQXHawk_ O_
364. t in Array Communication Modes Otherwise set RS 232 A as the Source port Port Routing for Symbol Data Output and Extra Symbol Information will be disabled on the Source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Preamble Parameters Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a Carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Preamble Characters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters C A Bekk mm m m ETx EOT ENa Ack maa s1 DLE ocr oc2 Nak SYN ETB CANI Esc _Fs Gs RS on fo edd a Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 39 Communication Postamble Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a Carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Postamble Characters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Postamble Enabled Postamble Characters Click Delete to remove characters 5 40 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Read
365. t number and the last digit is the checksum character When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only UPCIESN Disabled EAN Status Disabled Supplementals Status Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator Character i Supplementals Type Both UPC E as UPC 4 Disabled EAN Status EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European retail applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note The extra character identifies the country of origin 5 78 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Supplementals Status Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the imager reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Supplementals Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the imager will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not
366. t on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 500 Options 1 to 65535 in 1 ms increments Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Pulse Options 0 Pulse 1 Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin 2 Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition 3 Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Output 2 Parameters Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width outout mode gt Output 3 Parameters Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt A 66 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Matchcode WMatchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Matchcode Type Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Sequential Matching Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read
367. t results are shown in this field QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Learn The Learn command located in ESP s EZ Mode and in the Setup section on the Video tab puts the QX Hawk into a mode of operation that will cause it to learn the next Data Matrix symbol decoded Learn Mode remains active until either a Data Matrix symbol is decoded or Learn Mode is disabled by re clicking the Learn button Upon decoding a Data Matrix symbol the QX Hawk s image processing will save pertinent information about the learned symbol so that subsequent identical symbols will be processed more quickly see Learn Operations in Utilities for other Learn commands that can be sent serially Click the Learn button to start Data Matrix Learn Mode Video Evaluation Calibration WOT Configuration Database Ordered Output Locate _Coltrste team The Learn button will say Learning during the learn operation Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Calibrate Learning Select Lens The Learn button will say Learned when the Data Matrix symbol has been learned Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Leamed The learn state and parameters persist in the same way as ordinary parameters Examples e A QX Hawk in a Learned state has not been saved Cycling power will remove any
368. ta in this field QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 13 Master Database Request Master Symbol Data Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Masher Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 B z Recewe Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol After the size of the database is set the imager can read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number lt Gmaster symbol number gt To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For example lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 In the Master Database tab 1 Select the master symbol index number in which new symbol data will be stored 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 3 Recewe Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Caution If an index with existing data is selected that data will be overwritten by the new decoded data when this command is used 7 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager
369. ter alsoundmax Sounds and Audio Devices g Speech System B Taskbar and Start Menu 89 User Accounts Se Windows Firewall a Wireless Network Setup Wizard lt Comments Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and mobility Installs and troubleshoots hardware Install or remove programs and Windows components Configure administrative settings For your computer Calibrate monitor for consistent color create ICC profile Set up Windows to automatically deliver important updates Set the date time and time zone for your computer Change the appearance of your desktop such as the background screen saver colors Font sizes and screen resolution Customize the display of files and folders change file associations and make network files available offline Add change and manage Fonts on your computer Add remove and configure game controller hardware such as joysticks and gamepads Configure your Internet display and connection settings Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor blink rate and the character repeat rate Microsoft Office Outlook Profiles Customize your mouse settings such as the button configuration double click speed mouse pointers and motion speed Specify the CD DYD burn rights For the Nero Family of products Connects to other computers networks and the Internet Configure your NYIDI4 nview Desktop Manager settings Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settings
370. th status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Check Character Type Codabar Serial Cmd lt K4 71 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW7 Mod 11 3 Both Mod 16 and NW7 Mod 11 Check Character Output Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled
371. than 1 Multisymbol Number of Symbols Multisymbol Separator BRE gt ekg eeg RhE BIS m to oO cI Ta s b ras w fed m oo sle z aeRER US Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 43 Read Cycle Trigger The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle Note When calibrating the imager or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded Trigger Mode Continuous Read B Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 315 External Trigger State Active Closed Trigger Mode Continuous Read Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or imager functions It is not recommended for normal operations In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the imager is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit data for every symbol If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The imager sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting the imager may take longer than the timeout to process symbol data Trigger ma C ortinucus Read z Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read Leading Edge Contin
372. the Ordered Output table brings up the Ordered Output Filter Settings dialog Use these settings to determine Symbology Type Length of the symbol a user defined Matching String ASCII Lookup Wildcard Character Placeholder Character Database Number and Decode Direction Click Apply to save the settings to the corresponding filter ea QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 35 Ordered Output Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 5 active filters the last position can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Code 39 symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read m
373. the imager fails to decode the Data Matrix symbol a No Read message is displayed GRADE ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 68 i 16822 Print Growth H 53 Dx 48 z Dnom SA z i Dy 42 z Dmax 65 x i Dmin 35 z i Axial Monuniformity 4 82 havg 4 7 i A Yavg 4 6 i Unused ECC 34 z Eact Ty i D Emax 12 i GRADING Cell Damage 2z i Total Read Time 38H ms i Capture Time 7 ms i Locate Time 186 ms i Decode Time 3 ms i Fixe ls Element 4 6 i ECC Level 268 i Matrix Size 16x16 i Quiet Zone PASS i SYMBOL DATA CT 7 HGH HHHHH81854214 Validation Parameters Symbol Contrast Usage Lets the user know if contrast settings are less than acceptable Definition All the pixels that fall within the area of the test symbol including its required zone will be sorted by their reflectance values to select the darkest 10 and the lightest 10 of the pixels The arithmetic mean of the darkest and the lightest pixels is calculated and the difference of the two means is the Symbol Contrast ANSI Symbol Contrast grading is defined this way A 4 0 if SC 70 0 if SC 2 55 if SC gt 40 if SC 20 B 3 C 2 0 D 1 0 F 0 0 if SC lt 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 29 Static Validation Print Growth Definition The extent to which dark or light markings appropriately fill or exceed their module boundaries These values are determined by counting pixels in th
374. the settings to the imager and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important To use Differences from Default connect to the imager and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar 7 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Master Database i Click the Utilities button and then the Master Database Utilities tab to display the Master Database view Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matching and other Matchcode operations Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands 1 Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which the master symbol will be entered Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol mA ON Set Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded Database Size here into the selected index Read Rate Counters Device Control Diffe
375. timer increment Options are increments of seconds or minutes Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 Resolution Seconds 5 eCOM d QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 177 Diagnostics User Defined Name User Defined Name allows the user to enter any combination of ASCII characters to identify the imager User Defined Name J ka H A W E 5 178 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual es 6 ferminal Contents Temminal VINO OW fc oateeseaceocts cassaect aan are sti apsste seams eed pastas Ee oe cea tiecunaensteseest 6 2 FIN see ectes ene E E esi deae nee eaiae tise asada ute stun a adene cae aniasacanentuaueeasseaneres 6 3 Sa srs sce a cece ses eae ie ste ns acs cig E EAEE E EE E O E ES TT 6 4 ETE pa SAE E na ne ee oe ee ee eee eer 6 5 Terminal Window Me NnuS ccccccccceceececeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeseuseueeeeeeeeeesaeeaueusaeeeeeeeeeeeeaueaeseeeeseneauaneaeenees 6 6 This section describes the multiple functions of ESP s Terminal interface QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 6 7 Terminal Window Terminal Window a Terminal Click this button to display the Terminal view Copy paste save Type text here to Terminal Type serial find matching text screen commands in the Terminal here window Clear screen ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help
376. ting Response Timeout to zero The time that the imager will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RSZ232 A ATK f NAK Options RES ML REQ MUL STX MUL ETX MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STX ETH ETK ACK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout 0 005 Seconds LEC Status Disabled 5 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters LRC Status Used when extra data integrity is required An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REQ ALL STX MUL ETX MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ EMG STX STX ETH ETH ACK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout LRE Status Disabled DO ijsabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager Us
377. tion with the Image Process Looping feature to allow processing different regions of a captured image with different Image Processing Decode Settings In addition if combined with Output Filtering the user can order the output of decoded symbols in a captured image frame by their location in the Field of View Multiple Symbols with Same Symbol Data Operation ROI can be used to decode more than one of the same symbols and treat them as different symbols Multi Symbol Operation will work within the following rules e Multiple symbols of same symbol data can only be handled by using ROI mode This can only be done between different ROI IP Region settings e ROI IP Region settings within the database must be sequential Not Interlaced in order to correctly know when a new region has been tried If Database slot 2 and 3 are swapped the imager would then treat them as 4 separate ROI regions This would result in 4 different symbols with GDR of 1 instead of 2 different symbols with GDR count of 2 e ROI Regions will count the same symbol in the same region as additional decodes but only spanning multiple frames Each decode of same symbol with same ROI will add to the GDR count with additional frames e Multiple symbols can be within each ROI Region but cannot identify multiple Same Symbols If same symbol is in a ROI twice per frame then it will be counted as 1 decode or 1 more GDR count the second will be ignored e Filtering ca
378. tly in the imager capture and oa Display Options decode a symbol save it as a digital Mcurent Good Read eae ae file and perform histogram and line W Saved X Noread n Decode Good Read scan evaluations T Age Histogram l When you click on the Evaluation tab you will see the images that are currently stored in the imager Click Receive to refresh this view Click Capture Decode to display the and decode event will occur regardless of read cycle settings Click Read to trigger a read cycle If there is enough time in the read cycle up to 32 good reads or 6 full scale images can be captured and displayed depending on the size of the images and depending on the number enabled in Number of Captures 2 a Data ai under Capture Mode in the Camera Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs If you click Save the current image will be saved to the location of your choice Note An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to ESP JPEG images will be saved as jpg and bitmaps will be saved as bmp When you click the JPEG Image box notice that the Line Scan button is grayed out The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers but since the JPEG standard compresses image data it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality resolution by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100 1 being the lowest qu
379. to Digital Converter where the level of each pixel can be stored digitally Digital Signal Processor DSP A VLSI chip designed for ultra high speed arithmetic processing Often imbedded in a vision engine Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Direct Memory Access DMA A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device DMA See Direct Memory Access DSP See Digital Signal Processor Dynamic Range The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images the amount of usable signal QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 123 Glossary of Terms Edge Enhancement Image processing method to strengthen high spatial frequencies in the image EPROM See Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Embedded Memory Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the imager stops expecting symbol information to decode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM A memory chip that retains data when its power supply is turned off non volatile memory External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object rising edge The read cycle ends with a good
380. trigger status gt Default Comma Options Any bit ASCII character Decodes per Trigger Status Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 3 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 As Soon As Possible Options 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle Symbology ID Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AlIM Defined ID 2 Readable ID Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Duration Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character A 60 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices No Read Message No Read Message Status Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled No Read Message Serial Cmd lt K714 no read message status No Read message gt
381. tructure POF41 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Codeword Collection Single Image Note Sending lt a1 gt from ESP s Terminal will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the imager will reject any PDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 1 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 91 Symbologies Codeword Collection Codeword Collection Single Image t Single Image Multiple Image Single Image The imager will attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol only from the information provided in a single image Multipl
382. ts are controlled by the timing values entered in the Capture Time command Triggered Capture When set to trigger captures mode the imager operates in the following manner The number of captures represents the number of triggers expected from the system per read cycle The first trigger enters the read cycle Subsequent triggers initiate captures in the read cycle up to the number of captures is met or the end of read cycle condition is met Any additional triggers between reaching the number of captures and meeting the end of read cycle requirements will be ignored If the read cycle is fully qualified prior to reaching the number of captures and the symbol output is set to ASAP the symbol data will be output and all post processing Logic outputs video etc will finish but the imager will remain in the read cycle When enough triggers come in to satisfy the number of captures setting or a timeout expires the imager will exit the read cycle This operation would be synonymous with level triggered read cycle waiting for the trigger to fall If the end of read cycle is set for new trigger and the read cycle qualifications have not been met the read cycle will exit upon receiving the first trigger after reaching the number of captures setting At this time the post processing from the read cycle will complete and a new read cycle will begin 5 56 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Capture Time This command spe
383. tup 4 42 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Ree 5 Parameters Contents COMMUNICATION 0 eee ceccecceccecceeceececeecececeeeceeenecaceueeeeeueeaeeaeeaeeaeeeueaeeueeaeeueeaueneeaeeaeeaeeaesaueeaeseneness 5 2 Read Cycle ac sites csiascesecsascactanseneensneinasasbenasedasbenaesadiexeadeadasensunendseds ance iod neexieeuss bexeeadactnadexszs xeceuessancs 5 41 SVIMDONMOGICS M 5 61 VO eg 1 00 cy CS S ee A een ee eee 5 97 Symbol Quality reisien E anra a rA ee eee 5 159 MACHICO lt a nen On ee ee ae eee ee eee 5 166 AGIOS UNC Se ca eect cetera ct aka tne ap eet a ead wine ceed E E E E A E ues 5 175 This section explains the function and purpose of the Parameters commands in ESP s tabbed tree controls Important Unless otherwise specified command settings shown in this section are the default settings QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 1 Communication Communication Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Communication tab to display the Communication tree control Parameters Parameters ESP Values Communications RS232 A RS232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled Preamble Disabled A Se Disabled To open nested options To change a setting double c
384. units is set to millimeters the Focal Distance parameter has a range of 25 to 4000 Any value outside this range will be rejected When Distance units is set to 1 100 inch Focal Distance is limited to a range of 100 to 4000 If the user attempts to set the Focal distance to less than 100 1 inch the parameter will be set to 100 When a lens is changed on the QX Hawk the user can improve the accuracy of the Focal Distance parameter by using the lt OPTIC gt command Important lt OPTIC gt is not supported by the QX Hawk C Mount Imager Even after running lt OPTIC gt the system distance accuracy is approximate The command gives reasonable step sizes as apposed to completely unknown magnitudes but it is not expected that 2 units will exhibit the same exact focus for a given setting ee Focus Distance 25 4000 mm Distance Units Millimeters imm Distance Units Defines the measurement unit value of the Focal Distance parameter Required Focal DistanceDistance Units millimeter 0 Distance Units 1 00 inch 1 Focus Distance 20 Distance Units Millirneters mm Mlillimeters rann Inches 4 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Sub Sampling The camera can be enabled to sub sample pixels in the specified image frame Sub sampling can be specified as either 4 1 or 16 1 which signifies the sampling rate Note Sub Sampling is not available for the CCD model of the QX
385. uous Read 1 Output Trailing Edge External Level External Edge Seral Data Serial Data and Edge External Trigger State Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read 5 44 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Continuous Read 1 Output Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand In Continuous Read 1 Output the imager self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if Timeout is set to one second the imager sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the symbol remains in the field of view lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to New Trigger the imager will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the imager s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Numbe
386. up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the primary imager the one connected to the host to Serial Data Trigger Mode This will also set all the imagers in the chain to Serial Data when the command is executed Important All secondary imagers must be set to Serial Data Trigger Mode for Daisy Chain to function Before Autoconfigure the primary imager must be set to Serial S gt Primary Secondary Secondary S Imager S Imager S Imager Host Send the lt K150DAISY gt command from ESP s Terminal If necessary set the primary imager to External Edge After Autoconfigure the primary imager can be set to External Edge E but the other imagers must remain in Serial S gt Primary Secondary Secondary Host E Imager S Imager S Imager Pre Setup Requirements 1 5 38 Start setup by matching the communication settings of the downstream port of the primary imager to the upstream ports of the secondary imagers It may be necessary to set up all the upstream ports first so the chain can pass information Downstream ports on secondary imagers will be set up automatically during the setup process If the imager is Ethernet enabled first check to determine if RS 232 B is available If it is available set RS 232 B as the Source por
387. ups 3 Synchronous Copy File Ungrouped Axes Source QXHawk l ex Add On Instructions Dest QXHawk_JO_big_ptIN Data Types Gi User Defined amp QXHawk_command fe QxXHawk_device_status Ei QxHawk_external_inputs E QxHawk_external_outputs H O_big_pt OUT S QxHawk_IN_big_udt QXHawk O Eil QxHawk_IN_small_udt 1 ff QXHawk_IO_big_udt E QXHawk_IO_small_udt H QXHawk_OUT_udt E A Strings i str128 A str 4 i STRING MainRoutine MainProgrart hag 4 gt Monitor Tags Edit Tags Ecer 41 gt Enter non BOOL file source operand Rung 1 of 2 APP VER For the remainder of this document the big assembly set is demonstrated The system is now configured enough to test communication with QX Hawk QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 109 Allen Bradley PLC Setup 17 Select the control button next to Offline and select Download f RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help asal 8 sae o OO B31 Te CIE alal Offline J E RUN MENEN Red Pan AB ETHIP1410105233Backplane va No Forces Go Online Noe ipoe J Hlal LoL a Redundancy p IE a gt h Favorites Add On Alarms Timer Counter My Sa Controllet Program Mode Kas Controller Tags MscanLogix5561 controller Ee Run Mode ee ontr G Powe Test Mode El MainProgram MainRoutine Sj Tasks g a fa
388. ut 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Gutput State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Pulse Latch Mode 7 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output 5 150 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read C
389. v Symbology Settings Symbol Calibration Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 gt MFixed Composite Enabled Window of Interest WOI Framing Row and Column v WOI Margin 75 s ESP s Calibration interface shown during a calibration routine QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual ESP s Calibration interface shown after a calibration routine 4 21 Window of Interest Window of Interest The active pixel area of the image sensor is called the Window of Interest WOI The WOI allows the user to select an area of the field of view in which the desired symbol is located The programmable window of interest increases decode speed improves threshold and makes it easy to select specific symbols from among several in the field of view The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size of the window to define the Window of Interest Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 450 width Foe Window of Interest CMOS B Window of Interest Top T Left T Height 960 Width 1260 Window of Interest CCD Caution Window of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications 4 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Window of Interest Graphic Interface 1 From the Camera menu click the WOI tab to bring up Window of Interest If you haven t already captured an image click the Capture and Decode button to decode the
390. ve to Reader Save Current Settings for Power On lt Z gt Send and Cave No Save to Reader EOT On lt Ze gt Send and Save Customer No T Defaults for Power On L Recall Microscan Default Settings gt i e and Save for Power On Will not lt Zrd gt Send lt Zrd gt from Terminal No default sticky parameters L Recall Microscan Default Settings g Default Sticky Parameters and lt ZRDall gt Send lt ZRDall gt from Terminal No gt Save for Power On N Press and Recall Customer Default Settings hold while and Save for Power On ie Send ere WOM Neue powering on imager a When right clicking in a tree control to select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the imager itself follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled in Preferences General tab accessible from the Options dropdown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the imager or the lt Arp gt command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset QX Hawk Industrial
391. wer and communications as required by the application QX 1 Interface Device Pin Assignment 1 10 28V 2 Trig NM Input 1 Common 3 Ground 4 Trigger ZA AA Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2 is a 12 pin socket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data as required by the application The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed QX 1 Trigger Connector 4 pin Socket COMM4 0 POWER s TRIGGER This simple diagram shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device depending on the needs of the application The switches greatly increase signal routing flexibility QX 1 Communications I O 3 8 Power Trigger QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Power and Trigger Switching Power can be bussed between imagers and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required by the application Qx 1 mit gt E ax N gt T m To Power l Sup
392. with Instance 1 12 49 11 174 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 83 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 164265 Sent pkts 208135 13 58 38 950 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 02 38 790 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 8 msec Max Send Delay 1 msec Rev API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 24216 Sent pkts 30683 14 12 56 270 Connection closed with Instance 1 14 22 18 610 Connection opened with Instance 1 Max Recy Delay 9 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Rey API 25 35 msec Sent API 20 01 msec Revd pkts 6124 Sent pkts 7759 12 13 31 755 Error Request failed Target is not responding 12 13 41 750 Error Request failed Target is not responding 15 20 39 187 Open Connection failed for Instance 1 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 15 29 45 53A 9 Cannertion rinsed with Instance 1 1 Classi connections active Max Recy Delay 9 msec Max Send Delay 6 msec Max Recv API 25 35 Max Send API 20 01 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices 12 Change the first byte to non zero The first byte User Tag echo in the blue area IN will change to the same value few ElPScan ElPscan qxhawk eiptest1 asm1025big cfg File view Request I O Stack Device IO Module Help D ow te Target ElPScan Test Tool Network Path 10 10 5 234 g Adapter jo10o4130 o o Request all fields are in hex Host 10 10 4 130 Predefined None QX HAWK Con
393. wk C Mount Imager This parameter is sticky Once saved with a lt Z gt or lt Zc gt command it can only be defaulted with lt Zrdall gt or lt K525d gt Select Lenz Select Reader Optics Select the lens that is on the front of your reader Note the dots at the bottom of the lens 15 Degree lens 30 Degree lens 45 Degree lens Select Reader Optics Select the lens that is on the front of your reader Note the dots at the bottom of the lens 15 Degree lens 30 Degree lens 45 Degree lens Select Reader Optics Select the lens that is on the front of your reader Note the dots at the bottom of the lens 15 Degree lens 30 Degree lens 45 Degree lens 45 Degree Lens 4 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Camera Setup Lh Click the App Mode button and then the Setup button App Mode You will see the Camera Setup tree control to the right of the Video interface Setup y Parameters ESP Walues i Camera Setup Camera Settings ain 20 Shutter Speed 2500 E Illumination Type Bright Field Brightness High Focus Distance o0 Distance Units Millimeters The indicates z that the setting sub sampling Disabled is the default B Window of Interest Top Left Height width Image Processing Settings To open nested options single click the
394. xHawk_IO_big_t Source QXHawk_lO_small_pt OUT Source QXHawk_O_big_pt OUT i QXHawk_IO_small_udt Start Pending Rung Edits Ctrl Shift 5 Dest axHawk O Dest axHawk O QXHawk_OUT_udt a j Length 4 Length 1 fac Strings ra Accept Pending Rung Edits Ei str128 i Cancel Pending Rung Edits KA str 4 K STRING Verify Rung Go To Ctrl G Add Ladder Element Alt Ins Delete the selected Relay Ladder Logic Element s Rung 0 of 3 BPP PER i QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 107 Allen Bradley PLC Setup 15 Select one CPS instruction per rung the _small_ pt on the left or the _big_pt on the right Keep the one that corresponds to the assembly sizes configured for the module and delete the other RSLogix 5000 MscanLogix5561 1756 161 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help alsia S alel oA SCSI TH I IQ Offline D E RUN rE Path AB_ETHIPT MO105 23 Backplane O x No Forces b Ok No Edits A rin aj Hitotfio ajo gt 4 gt h Favorites Add On Alarms Bit Timer Counter Unscheduled Programs J Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions 5 6 Data Types al User Defined E OXHawk_IN_big_udt E QxHawk_IN_small_udt K QXHawk_IO_big_udt K QxHawk_I0_small_udt K QxHawk_OUT_udt 5 El Strings E strize K str256 A stre4 K STRING E Add On Defined E Eg Predefined E Module Defined Tre
395. xample a carriage return will be shown as M Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHex Gukpuk Control Control Hex 5 108 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EZ Trax Output EZ Trax Output Status When EZ Trax output is enabled the imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Enabled Sele Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode Enabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 90 Object Info Gukpuk Disabled Grade Output Disabled Comm Port selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files EZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Fort Host E Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled Image Mode Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output EZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Both Noread and Good Aead Image Format Disabled JPEG Quality Good Read Object Info Gukpuk Noread 7 Grade Output au Noread and Good Read ismatch QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 109 I O Parameters Image Format Selects the format of the image output file EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed ai JPEG Quality Object Info Output Compressed Grade Output Disabled JP
396. xed Symbol Length Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 10 Options 1 to 16 Minimum Bars Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 4 Options 1 to 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 55 Serial Commands Bar Width Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Mixed Options 0 Mixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Direction Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Forward Options 0 Forward 1 Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 400 Options 1 to 65535 GS1 DataBar RSS DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Limited RSS Limited Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBa
397. xed Symbol Length Status When disabled the imager will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled D i fa b E d x Enabled Fixed Symbol Length This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Symbol Length 10 1 64 5 82 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Pharmacode Used mostly in pharmaceutical packaging Encodes up to five different numbers each with its own color which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999 999 In binary format each input can have up to 19 ones and zeros B Pharmacode Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 2 Minimum Bars 2 Bar Width Status Mixed Direction Forward Fixed Threshold Value 10 Background Color white Important When Pharmacode is enabled other linear symbologies will not decode properly Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Dis
398. xial Mon uniformiky Threshold Unused ECC Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Unused ECC grade is under the threshold Barade C ka Unused ECC Threshold 5 146 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 147 I O Parameters
399. y P address mode gt 192 168 0 100 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP Address Mode Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway IP address mode gt Default 1 DHCP Options 0 Static 1 DHCP Ethernet TCP Ports TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 TCP Port 1 7CP Port 2 gt Default 2001 Options 1024 65535 TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Default 2003 Options 1024 65535 RS 232 A Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd Default Options A 32 lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Extra Symbol Information RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol informat
400. ycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 3 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 151 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 3 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a per
401. yet 2 There is currently no way to receive serial command responses back from the QX Hawk QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 97 Using EtherNet IP Programming Flow Charts Triggered by PLC symbol data required timeout or decode ends read cycle Setup Read Cycle Trigger Mode External Edge or External Level Symbol Data Output Enabled globally and for EtherNet IP When to Output As Soon As Possible End of Read Cycle Timeout No Read message Enabled Triggered by PLC Barcode data required Timeout or decode ends readcycle ool Wait for system event begin bar code reading Copy IN Sequence to PrevSeq Init Clear OUT Command ta g Set OUT Command Trigger to 1 Mo Is PrevSeg N Sequenc E Yes Process IN DecodedData Clear OUT Command Trigger to 0 Mo Is IN CommandEcho Trigger 07 A 98 PrevSeq is a separate program tag Varlable used to detect new read data IN Command Trigger will also change in response Wait for IN Saquence to change Optional Use a timeout mechanism to limit the time waiting for IN Sequence to change lf a timeout occurs assume a MOREAD and initiate error handling Check for NOREAD Use the string length field to determine the number of valid characters Wait for reader to recognize the falling trigger Optional Use a timeout mechanism to limit the time waiting for the echoed Trigger to fall
402. ype Sequential Matching Match Start Position Match Length Wild Card Disabled izabled Enabled Wild Card Sequential Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Wild Card Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Note If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Sequential Instructs the imager to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Instructs the imager to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers Sequential Matching Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position Increment Match Length Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence oan Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Hew Master Pin Disabled 5 168 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Match Start Position Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date an

QX Hawk Industrial Imager User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents